Home

SP600 AC Drive User Manual Version 2.0

Contents

1. Cefai ojal Front View Front View Cover Removed Optional Splitter Cable RECBL SSP Bottom View Connector DPI Port 1 Description OIM connection when installed in cover DPI Port 2 Cable connection for remote OIM or VS Utilities DPI Port 3 Cable connection for remote OIM or VS Utilities DPI Port 5 Connection for an optional communications module Power Terminal Block Connections for input and output power wiring Signal and I O Terminal Block Connections for signal and I O wiring Figure 2 4 Drive Connections NEMA 1 Drives About the Drive 2 21 Figure 2 5 shows the locations of the drive terminal blocks and connectors used to set up and operate the drive on NEMA 4 drives The NEMA 4 drive has a different location for the DPI serial connector 01 than on the NEMA 1 drive tl ALO oar a 1 vIe RO 7 Et 6 atl eel i
2. o Alam Description Analog In An analog input is configured for alarm on signal loss and Loss signal loss has occurred Bipolar Parameter 190 Direction Mode is set to Bipolar or Conflict Reverse Dis and one of more of the following digital input functions is configured Fwd Rev Run Fwd Run Rev Jog Fwd or Jog Rev Dig In Digital input functions are in conflict Combinations marked ConflictA with a 5 will cause an alarm Accel 2 Decel 2 Fwd Rev Acc2 Dec2 Accel 2 Decel 2 Jog Jog Fwd Jog Rev Fwd Rev Dig In Digital input functions are in conflict Combinations marked ConflictB with a will cause an alarm Run Fwd Run Rev Jog Rev Fwd Rev Start i E E Stop CF Run Run Fwd Run Rev Jog Jog Fwd Jog Rev Fwd Rev Dig In More than one physical input has been configured to the ConflictC same input function Multiple configurations are not allowed for the following input functions Forward Reverse Run Reverse Bus Regulation Mode B Speed Select 1 Jog Forward Acc2 Dec2 Speed Select 2 Jog Reverse Accel 2 Speed Select 3 OIM Control Decel 2 UserSetBitO UserSetBit1 Troubleshooting the Drive 13 5 Table 13 3 Alarm Descriptions Continued Q Description Digln Bad Unsupported function selected in Digital In x Sel Value parameters 361 3
3. C 1 Analog Input Selection Path C 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Pur HOA 10 yun anng pau SNES Id pupo Buga Id GUELET BI Id 1H 1k puig pds 1 puig pds H H enen peojaig Tar Byuog Id ys L LR did Ja HA IES AH Id H ER N 0 L t RR yuo id paygeuz i S 4 SNAS id R X Carano ia Te Ee B C JOU Id Ta aa XJ pwo id e F C 494 Id 4 USS 494 Id Cez T Qoa sxia TRT 2385809 Id EEJ yuru et did Process PI Block Diagram o TWD BeN Id Wn Sod Id SMnO S 9 dueg aur 12 x yeu pds pug pds JL m L duey pds LS SeS Id JEIJEN BHG id auez yuo Id D 1 Process PI Block Diagram D 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Record of User Settings Parameter Name Path File gt Group Setting Motor Type Motor Control gt Motor Data Motor NP Volts Motor Control gt Motor
4. Front View Cover Removed LLL Li L2 L3 DC BRK Ti T2 T3 PE PE R S T U V w s Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC terminal of the power terminal strip and the DC test point DC Test Point DC Bus Location on A and B frames DC Bus Location on C and D frames Figure 13 1 Location of DC Bus Voltage Measuring Points Step 5 Once the drive has been serviced reattach the drive s cover Step 6 Reapply input power 13 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 13 2 Determining Drive Status Using the Ready LED Network Status LEDs Ready LED See table 12 1 Front View Network status LEDs are not available unless a network communications module is installed in the drive Refer to the appropriate network module manual for these status LED definitions Figure 13 2 Location of the Ready LED Table 13 1 Ready LED Status Definitions Description Green Flashing Drive ready but not running and no faults are present Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing The drive is not ready Check parameter See section 214 Start Inhibits 13 3 Steady An alarm condition exists Check parameters 211 Drive Alarm 1 and 212 Drive Alarm 2 Red Flashing A fault has occurred a section Steady A non resettable fault has occurred Troubles
5. A Optional i Splitter Cable ARTO o RECBL SSP A Connector Description DPI Port2 Cable connection for remote OIM or VS Utilities DPI Port 3 Cable connection for remote OIM or VS Utilities DPI Port5 Connection for an optional communications module Signal and I O Connections for signal and I O wiring Terminal Block Power Terminal Connections for input and output power Block wiring Figure 2 5 Drive Connections NEMA 4 Drives 2 22 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 2 7 Drive Communication Options The flat ribbon cable connector labeled in figure 2 4 and in figure 2 5 is a parallel bus connection port that provides a means of attaching optional communication modules such as the DeviceNet Network Communication module to the SP600 AC drive The optional module is mounted inside the drive Refer to the appropriate module instruction manual for more information See 2 7 for a list of available communication options Table 2 7 Communication Options Model Numbers and Instruction Manual Numbers Instruction Description Model Number Manual DeviceNet Communication Module RECOMM DNET D2 3478 Profibus Communication Module RECOMM PBUS D2 3479 Interbus Communication Module RECOMM IBUS D2 3480 ControlNet Communication Module RECOMM CN
6. Figure 3 9 A Frame Flange Mount Cutout Dimensions 3 12 SP600 AC Drive User Manual S Ww 12x 23 5 20 14 4 acc ie gy l SAA Figure 3 11 C Frame Flange Mount Cutout Dimensions Mounting the Drive 3 13 al Leece d j H 2 31 1 20x 235 2014 te T J LT DN L Figure 3 13 E Frame Flange Mount Cutout Dimensions 3 14 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 3 2 1 Verifying the Drive s Watts Loss Rating When mounting the drive inside another enclosure determine the watts loss rating of the drive from tables 2 4 through 2 6 These tables list the typical full load power loss watts value 4 kHz carrier frequency Ensure that the enclosure is adequately ventilated and the ambient air is within the specified temperature range S NEMA 1 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F e NEMA 4x 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Mounting the Drive 3 15 Mounting the Drive 3 16 4 1 Wiring Requirements for the Drive ATTENTION The user is responsible for conforming with all applicable local national and international codes Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruc
7. gt gt Stopped 2 Auto 18 PO SP600 Main Menu Diagnostics Diag Status Info el OIM Version IN Drive Statusi AT L Fault Info L Drive Status2 Drive Alarm1 Diagnostics Monitor Lang ally Highlight item ally Highlight parameter Highlight Diagnostics icon lt gt S S Select Figure 13 7 Accessing the Drive Status Parameters 13 8 4 Accessing the List of Changed Parameters The LCD OIM provides a list of parameters that have been changed from their default value To access this list refer to figure 13 8 gt gt Stopped Autom Po SP600 lt gt Main Menu eam PAE Parameters Monitor Lang Tee ee ESC WU gt gt Stopped ada PO SP600 al Parameters By Group fies P Numbers 4 l Parameter P 1234 C Parameter Name Value Value Figure 13 8 Accessing the List of Changed Parameters Troubleshooting the Drive 13 25 13 8 5 Determining the Product Version The LCD OIM provides hardware and firmware version information for connected devices including the OIM down to the component level Device Version To access the device version information refer to figures 13 9 and 13 10 z stormed Bae a PO SP600 Main Menu Diagnostics View Fault Queue N A l gt Device Version OIM Versio
8. e069 ess ozeo vor e2 so oz o ez oes esol oer sz oc or ze os xoxsoozkvaso vies 905 goos og o9 zs 06 99 09 zur zasl zeel eeel zz oe oe op xxxxeco zhpase zoey ely esse 99 is op s9 us e zol zor zeel zeel se sz zz os xexovo ztpase oree eor Lese os sor ve vs sor ze ete se les lass si oz se sz xxxreoziraso ger T ezv ezer w ce ze sh s os evz rez loozi oo T st st oz xexxzzo 2hrago gece zve vso ce Izrez ze ee ave zz jee vol oorl oo sz or ut st xexxezo zhpagg reez T oze ese ze fool w rez zz vsi vz ro lvo a ss sz sz ov xxxpozivaso eu gzz oor T est tra m Tralee foul re so ez ez or s es sz xxxoziraso Lia zee see z eel os ze ee ze ee leu re ve ze e v os xxxsooziraso gee orz ovo szi sslos ezl ssl os os sol zr spl si z zz oe xxsoozivaso sag iz ver o9 leri ve o sp ce lee erl zel os re st st oz appa ely sel giz zelre ve zel v2 ve vrz sz oz gi sso szol srol or woxazziraso 6 i ci ot L cL gL T C SO XXLdl Z pdS9 snem snem snem Tass l uW p quog sss Tuig L 1 woo Aor A 00 laost aoor mA dH ma dH pequny spon SL ROST glBUPA idul OWA osy indui ovA oo sduryanduy gamd Anao Anado abuel4 0S1 WOLL P VININ C Yay paads nd 3 ppo Ind ZH b SS07 SREM
9. Figure 3 3 Minimum Mounting Clearances 3 6 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 3 1 4 Drive Dimensions and Weights Overall dimensions and weights are illustrated in figures 3 4 3 5 as an aid to calculating the total area required by the SP600 AC drive Table 3 2 SP600 Frames Output Power Frame Size HP kw 208 240V AC Input 400 480V AC Input 600V AC Input ND HD ND HD Not Filtered Filtered IP66 Not Filtered Filtered IP66 Not Filtered Filtered 0 5 0 33 0 37 0 25 0 75 0 55 1 5 1 1 wo wo gt m m o G G 91 w w w m m o CG1 G G 91 0 w w w w m m 9 9 9 900 BD w gt gt LL TAT Al Dimensions in mm in IP20 NEMA Type 1 122 4 4 82 225 7 8 89 179 8 7 08 94 2 3 71 211 6 8 33 5 8 0 2 71 5 97 171 7 6 76 234 6 9 24 179 8 7 08 122 7 4 83 220 2 8 67 5 8 0 3 60 7 93 185 0 7 28 300 0 11 81 179 8 7 08 137 6 5 42 285 6 11 25 5 8 0 6 89 15 18 219 9 8 66 350 0 13 78 179 8 7 08 169 0 6 65 335 6 13 21 5 8 0 9 25 20 4 280 3 11 04 555 8 21 88 207 1 8 15 200 0 7 87 491 0 19 33 6 9 0 18 60 41 0 IP66 NEMA
10. Analog In 2 Current 2 Voltage Reads value at 18 amp 19 Isolated bipolar differential 0 to 10V unipolar 10 bit or 10V bipolar 10 bit amp sign 100k ohm input impedance Isolated 4 20mA 10 bit amp ap 100 ohm input impedance Analog Out Volts 10V Pot Common Analog Out Volts 2 Output Freq 0 to 10V 10 bit 10k ohm 2k ohm minimum load Referenced to chassis ground Common if internal 10V supply terminal 10 is used Installing Control Wiring Table 7 1 Wiring Signal and Control I O to the Terminal Block Continued QAOA W AQIAAQQOOP V 28 W W W ATOTTRTTRTAATARTAG aN AD Factory Default Description 24 Digital Out 2 N O 1 Run See description at No s 11 13 380 387 25 Digital Out 2 Common 26 Digital Out2 N C NOT Run 1 Contacts shown in unpowered state Any relay programmed as Fault or Alarm will energize pick up when power is applied to drive and deenergize drop out when fault or alarm exists Relays selected for other functions will energize only when that condition exists and will deenergize when condition is removed 2 These inputs outputs are dependent on a number of parameters See Related Parameters 3 Differential Isolation External source must be less than 10V with respect to PE 7 Differential Isolation External source mus
11. 9 15 9 8 5 Selecting Reverse Video for the Process Display seede acess TE cede 9 16 9 9 Controlling the Drive From the LCD OIM 9 16 9 9 1 Selecting the Logic and Reference Source 9 17 9 9 2 Starting the Drive ee eee eee eee 9 17 Contents III 9 9 3 Stopping the DVG sees ee eee eee 9 17 9 9 4 Changing Motor Direction sss see eee eee 9 18 9 9 5 Jogging the Drive eee eeseeeeeneeeeeeneetenneees 9 18 Starting Up the Drive Using the LCD OIM 10 1 Preparing for Start Ups see eee eee e eee 10 1 10 2 Running the Start Up Routines sees eee eee eee ee 10 2 10 3 Other Start Up Consideraliong sese eee eee 10 5 10 3 1 Sensorless Vector Performance eecee 10 5 10 3 2 Operation Over Wide Speed Ranges gt 120 Hz 10 5 10 3 3 Start Stop Control see 10 5 10 3 4 Speed Reference Source eee ee eee 10 6 Programming Basics 11 1 About Parameters cesse esse esec esec e eser eser ener 11 1 11 2 How Parameters are Organized sese eee eee 11 2 11 3 Accessing the Parameter eee ee eee eee eee eee 11 3 11 3 1 Accessing Parameters By GOUD eee ee 11 4 11 3 2 Accessing Parameters by Number sss sees 11 4 11 3 3 Accessing Changed Parameters eeee 11 4 11 3 4 Selecting the Parameter Access Level 11 5 11 3 5 Using the Parameter Access Level Password to Restrict Access to Other Parameter Levels 11 6 11 4Using the Write Protect Password to Ensure Program SOCUMTY cites eta en E hate lbe tas cdebseeth
12. Autotune Motor Control gt Torg Attributes Parameters Cross Referenced by Name B 1 Parameter Name Break Frequency Path File gt Group Motor Control gt Volts per Hertz Break Voltage Motor Control gt Volts per Hertz Bus Reg Gain Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes Bus Reg Mode A Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes Bus Reg Mode B Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes CarrierFrequency Dynamic Control gt Load Limits Commanded Freq Monitor gt Metering Compensation Motor Control gt Torg Attributes Control SW Ver Monitor gt Drive Data Current Lmt Gain Dynamic Control gt Load Limits Current Lmt Sel Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates Current Lmt Val Dynamic Control gt Load Limits Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Communication gt Datalinks Data In A2 Link A Word 2 Communication gt Datalinks Data In B1 Link B Word 1 Communication gt Datalinks Data In B2 Link B Word 2 Communication gt Datalinks Data In C1 Link C Word 1 Communication gt Datalinks Data In C2 Link C Word 2 Communication gt Datalinks Data In D1 Link D Word 1 Communication gt Datalinks Data In D2 Link D Word 2 Communication gt Datalinks Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 Communication gt Datalinks Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 Communication gt Datalinks Data Out B1 Link B Word 1 Communication gt Datal
13. Parameter LUIS ssssersssee eee esser eee ennenen nre nne 12 2 Table 12 2 Default Values for Preset Speeds 1 7 12 26 Table 12 3 Dynamic User Set Mode sese 12 60 Table 12 4 Analog Output Scaling sese eee eee eee eee 12 86 Contents IX Table 12 5 Speed Select Input sees ee ee eee 12 88 Table 12 6 Default Values for Parameters 2061 2060 eee 12 88 Table 12 7 Drive Response to Jog Forward and Jog Reverse Inputs 12 90 Table 12 8 Effect of Speed Select Input State on Selected Reference12 92 Table 12 9 Dynamic User Mode sss sss 12 94 Table 13 1 Ready LED Status Denntiong sese eee eee eee eee e 13 3 Table 13 2 Types of AIama ssssessseessees sees esec sees nenen ennenen 13 4 Table 13 3 Alarm Descnpiong esse sees eee eee eee 13 5 Table 13 4 Alarm Names Cross Referenced by Alarm Numbers13 7 Table 13 5 Fault Se 13 8 Table 13 6 Fault Descriptions and Corrective Actions 0ceee 13 11 Table 13 7 Fault Names Cross Referenced by Fault Number 13 17 Table 13 8 Test Point Codes and Functions sss sese eee eee eee 13 17 Table 13 9 Drive Does Not Start From Start Run or Jog Inputs Wired to the Terminal BIOCK sese eee eee eee 13 18 Table 13 10 Drive Does Not Start or Jog From OM eee 13 19 Table 13 11 Drive Does Not Respond to Changes IN Speed Command sees eee eee eee 13 20 Table 13 12 Drive Does Not Operate in Manual Mode sss
14. Programming Basics 11 3 1 Accessing Parameters By Group To access parameters by group select By Groups from the Parameters menu on the LCD OIM Refer to figure 11 2 The LCD OIM will first display a list of files Select the file in which the desired parameter group is located Chapter 12 and Appendix E provide the File gt Group path for each parameter 11 3 2 Accessing Parameters by Number To access parameters by number select P Numbers from the Parameters menu on the LCD OIM Refer to figure 11 2 Using this option you can view the parameters within the selected access level e The Advanced level allows you to view all parameters e The Standard level allows you to view a subset of the Advanced level e The Basic level allows you to view a subset of the Standard level Note that the LCD OIM will not display any parameter that is not within the selected access level Refer to section 11 3 4 for more information about selecting access levels 11 3 3 Accessing Changed Parameters The Changed Parameters selection provides a method of viewing only those parameter that are different from the default configuration To access the changed parameters select Changed Params from the Parameters menu on the LCD OIM Refer to figure 11 2 11 4 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 11 3 4 Selecting the Parameter Access Level The SP600 AC drive provides three levels of access to the parameters Basic 0 Standard 1 and Advanced 2
15. Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz Default Maximum Speed Access 1 Path Speed Command gt Speed References See also 82 Analog input reference scaling Scales the upper value of the Speed Ref Sel 90 selection when the source is an analog input Important Parameter 91 corresponds to Analog In 1 Hi 322 or Analog In 2 Hi 325 depending on the analog input assigned as a source See figure 12 51 12 24 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 92 Speed Ref A Lo Range Maximum Speed _ 0 1 Hz Default 0 0 Hz Access 1 Path Speed Command gt Speed References See also 81 Analog input reference scaling Scales the lower value of the Speed Ref A Sel 90 selection when the source is an analog input Important Parameter 92 corresponds to Analog In 1 Lo 323 or Analog In 2 Lo 326 depending on the analog input assigned as a source See figure 12 51 96 TB Man Ref Sel Range 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 8 Reserved 9 MOP Level 10 Reserved 11 Preset Spd 1 12 Preset Spd 2 13 Preset Spd 3 14 Preset Spd 4 15 Preset Spd 5 16 Preset Spd 6 17 Preset Spd 7 Default 2 Analog In 2 Access 1 Path Speed Command gt Speed References See also 97 98 361 366 Specifies the manual speed reference source when a digital input is configured for manual mode selection See parameters 361 366 97 TB Man Ref Hi Range Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz Default Maximum Speed Access 1 Path Speed Command gt Speed References Se
16. lad ee Display Lall Monitor F3 Select text edit screen lt gt Move through label text ATS Move through letters lal and symbols Fs Toggle between upper and lower case F4 Save S Select scale edit screen AIS Adjust scale 4 Accept scaling value F4 Save pi Select parameter edit screen A v Scroll through parameter lal YJ numbers Select parameter Save Figure 9 11 Customizing the Process Display Screen 9 8 3 Customizing the Function Keys The function keys F1 F2 F3 and F4 also called F Keys on the OIM can be customized to perform several pre configured functions when the process display screen is active Up to eight function keys can be configured Pressing lt gt while the display screen is active toggles between each set of four functions As shipped from the factory the F1 key is configured for the Auto Manual selection function and the F4 key is configured for the Clear Fault Queue function To assign a function to an F Key select the Display icon from the Main Menu as shown in figures 9 12 and 9 13 The F Key definitions are the same for all OIMs connected to the drive regardless of the port used 9 12 SP600 AC Drive User Manual gt gt Stopped 2 PO SP600 Main Menu Display Function List Language Sse figure DDD Monitor F2 Undefined lad Function Keys F3 Undefined B12 Ci
17. lt 72 4 2 85 gt S 02 7 lt 96 1 ol KS m S 101 9 4 01 J 140 6 5 54 Frame A Frame B 129 3 5 09 N 7 eo 164 1 6 46 28 5 1 12 Dia lt 75 4 2 97 gt ie OE De 183 7 3 30 gt isa t 22 2 087 Dia R L laces 53 1 2 09 Le 51 9 2 04 lt 73 0 2 87 gt lt 92 2 3 63 gt x 107 3 4 22 gt e 111 2 4 38 gt 135 5 6 33 Frame C Frame D 210 0 8 27 108 0 4 25 gt lt 108 0 4 25 gt 159 0 6 26 210 0 8 27 Frame E Dimensions in mm in Figure 3 8 SP600 Flange Mount Bottom View Dimensions Mounting the Drive 3 11 3 2 Mounting the Drive Refer to figures 3 4 and 3 5 for drive mounting dimensions See figures 3 9 to 3 12 for flange mount cutout dimensions AutoCad dimension drawings dxf can be obtained from the www reliance com website Attach the drive to the vertical surface using the mounting holes provided Panel mount drives Drives should be mounted using 10 32 bolts Use washers under the bolt heads Flange mount drives Use the fasteners supplied with the drive
18. C e Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation Division amp II 194 F RHH RHW 2 and impervious corrugated continuously welded Anixter 7V 7xxxx 3G aluminum armor or equivalent Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket overall e Three copper grounds on 10 AWG and smaller 4 1 1 Power Wire Sizes Input power wiring should be sized according to applicable codes to handle the drive s continuous rated input current Output wiring should be sized according to applicable codes to handle the drive s continuous rated output current See table 4 2 for the range of power wire sizes that the terminals can accommodate Table 4 2 Power Terminal Block Specifications Wire Size Range Frame Max Min Torque 0 6 N m 5 in Ib Name Description Power Input power Terminal Block and motor connections 1 4 N m 12 in Ib 2 71 N m 24 in lb 1 6 N m Terminating 14 in lb point for wiring shields 1 Maximum minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept These are not recommendations Wiring Requirements for the Drive 4 3 4 1 2 Using Input Output Contactors Input Contactor Precautions ATTENTION A contactor or other device that routinely disconnects and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive hardware damage The drive is designed to use control input signals that will start and stop the motor If an input device is u
19. Dyn UserSet Cnd sss sees eee 12 59 Figure 12 29 DynUsrSetSel sss sesses sese serere ereenn 12 60 Figure 12 30 Drive Status 1 2091 sese 12 61 Figure 12 31 Drive Status 2 2101 12 62 Figure 12 32 Drive Alarm 1 211 sse 12 63 Figure 12 33 Drive Alarm 2 2121 sese 12 63 Figure 12 34 Start Inhibits 214 seer 12 64 Figure 12 35 Dig In Status 216 0 eee eee 12 65 Figure 12 36 Dig Out Status 217 sees 12 66 Figure 12 37 Status 1 Fault 227 eee 12 68 Figure 12 38 Status 2 Fault 228 eee 12 68 Figure 12 39 Alarm 1 Fault 229 eee 12 69 Figure 12 40 Alarm 2 Fault 230 eee eee 12 69 Figure 12 41 Fault Config 1 2281 sese eee eee 12 71 Figure 12 42 Alarm Config 1 2591 sese 12 72 Figure 12 43 Drive Logic Rslt 271 sese 12 73 Figure 12 44 Manual Mask 28061 12 74 Figure 12 45 Stop OWnSr sees ee eee 12 75 Figure 12 46 Manual OWner sees eee eee eee 12 75 Figure 12 47 Data Received By the Drive From the Network 12 76 Figure 12 48 Data Sent By the Drive To the Network 08 12 78 Figure 12 49 Anlg In Config 3201 12 79 Figure 12 50 Anlg In Sqr Root 3211 12 80 Figure 12 51 Analog Input Scaling Example eee ee eee ee eee 12 81 Figure 12 52 Anlg Out Absolute 841 sse 12 85 Figure 12 53 Dig Out1 OffTime 23821 eee 12 97 Figure 12 54 Dig Out2 OffTime 23871 12 101 Figure 13 1 Lo
20. Speed Command gt Speed Trim Voltage Class Utility gt Drive Memory Parameters Cross Referenced by Name B 8 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Analog Input Selection Path loquog uonoe ag Dussaud JOOWeIeg yndjnganduy i Tamanna a o 5 P S EEE L ayel L awn uaung joeqnes 39u3134 enue L y y S a30 4 J L qp ld L HH Id j CI nal j LY y j x x A A A queuing queuing a parey parey 6 zH su wuya Va yur queuing gt aT p Ot cores eer a T i yurag R yoeqpae Id l 18S INO wu 811 gt Cee a l l T WuryaqeoS a aoualajay Id T ywr ejeos jenuew gL yur yereos WU A A 611 IH WUE qywiyajeos ozi Peper yuras 18487 eyeg ozi UL Y ISU X x 16 1HY seu pads a 01v RR pes nap e L L Lk T S G S PP iE dd i 4 4 l 4 a L4 i i l l 18S A871 9 90 ag jw uung lag y9eqp Id l 195 39u8194 4 Id l 8S 2Y Vew gL j 9 9 Ul WH 06 18S Y 434 paads USU ee RT K NEU e 668 1 7 eee SS C S aeos Z paenaioeneprenna T 6ojeuy jeg E F UU 10 SO ndu Bogu TS 7 oan ER heuse Tec l oqzuj6geuy 9Z 4 N agog Boreuy IE YW 10 SHOA ndul Bojeuy aN lee C D l 07 LU Bogu Eze C F Bojeuy
21. X X Nibble 4 Nibble 1 x Reserved Bit Figure 12 32 Drive Alarm 1 211 212 Drive Alarm 2 Range See figure12 33 Default Read Only Access 1 Path Utility gt Diagnostics Utility gt Alarms See also 211 230 Indicates Type 2 alarm conditions that currently exist in the drive See section 13 3 for alarm descriptions SS N ZEE RTK KL e RE SSSTS Z G D 0101 Xx 010101010101010101010 1 Condition True 15 1413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 O Condition False g Nibble4 Nibble3 Nibble2 Nibble1 X Reserved Bit Figure 12 33 Drive Alarm 2 212 Parameter Descriptions 12 63 213 Speed Ref Source Displays the source of the speed reference of the drive 214 Start Inhibits Displays the inputs currently preventing the drive from starting Q Y S Z S x x 0 x 1 Inhibit True 15 14 13 12 0 Inhibit False ig Nibble 4 x Reserved Bit Figure 12 34 Start Inhibits 214 12 64 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 215 Last Stop Source Range 0 Pwr Removed 1 Local OIM 2 DPI Port 2 3 DPI Port 3 4 Reserved 5 Network 6 Reserved 7 Digital In 8 Fault 9 Not Enabled 10 Sleep 11 Jog Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also Displays the source that
22. e A stop command from any attached OIM will always be enabled regardless of the value of Logic Source Sel e Network stop commands are effective only when Logic Source Sel is set to Network or All Ports e Terminal block stop commands are effective only when Logic Source Sel 89 is set to Terminal Blk or All Ports Failure to observe these precautions could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life 7 2 The terminal block Drive Enable if configured and Function Loss inputs are always active The terminal block Stop input must be closed only when the terminal block is the control source See figure 7 1 Wiring the Signal and Control I O The drive has six logic inputs that are configurable using parameters 361 to 366 The logic inputs can be 24 volts AC or DC There are two relay outputs that are configurable using parameters 380 to 387 two analog inputs and one analog output Important points to remember about I O wiring Always use copper wire Wire with an insulation rating of 600 V or greater is recommended e Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 0 3 meters 1 foot Important 1 O terminals labeled or Common are not referenced to earth ground and are designed to greatly reduce common mode interference Grounding these terminals can cause signal noise Wire the drive s signal and control I O to the terminal block as shown in table 7 1 7
23. e Fast positive changes in input voltage more than a 10 increase within 6 minutes can cause uncommanded positive speed changes however an OverSpeed Limit fault will occur if the speed reaches Max Speed Overspeed Limit If this condition is unacceptable action should be taken to 1 limit supply voltages within the specification of the drive and 2 limit fast positive input voltage changes to less than 10 Without taking such actions if this operation is unacceptable the adjust freq portion of the bus regulator function must be disabled see parameters 161 and 162 e Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded deceleration times however a Decel Inhibit fault is generated if the drive stops decelerating altogether If this condition is unacceptable the adjust freq portion of the bus regulator must be disabled see parameters 161 and 162 In addition installing a properly sized dynamic brake resistor will provide equal or better performance in most cases Note that these faults are not instantaneous and have shown test results that take between 2 and 12 seconds to occur Sets the method and sequence of the DC bus regulator voltage control The choices are dynamic brake frequency adjust or both You can select separate modes of control for Mode A and Mode B through a configured logic input When option 3 or 4 is selected the bus controller will attempt to regulate the bus voltage using the selected technique fi
24. e Opening an Enable digital input e Reissuing the Start command e DC brake time expiring Caution must be used when setting DC Brake Level Excess motor current could damage the motor Caution must also be observed since motor voltage will exist even while stopped 157 DC Brake Lvi Sel Range 0 DC Brake Lvl 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 Default 0 DC Brake Lvl Access 1 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes See also 155 156 158 159 Selects the source for DC Brake Level 158 You can also select the amount of time that braking will be applied 159 as well as magnitude of current 158 This mode of braking will generate up to 40 of the rated motor torque for braking It is typically used for low inertia loads 158 DC Brake Level Range 0 to Rated Amps x 1 5 0 1 Amps Default Rated Amps Access 1 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes See also 155 157 159 Sets the DC braking current level used for the DC injection braking mode parameter 155 3 The DC braking voltage used in this function is created by a PWM algorithm and may not generate the smooth holding force needed for some applications ATTENTION If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used to stop the motor Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life ATTENTION This feature should not be used with synchronous or per
25. inputs analog 2 7 Interbus module 2 23 IR Voltage Drop 62 12 16 J Jog Speed 100 12 26 jumper locations 3 3 K key descriptions LCD OIM 9 4 kits and options communication 2 23 L Language 201 12 58 Last Stop Source 215 12 65 LCD OIM see OIM LCD LEDs network status 13 3 Ready 13 3 LevelSense Start 168 12 48 line reactor 6 6 Load Frm Usr Set 198 12 57 Logic Source Sel 89 12 21 Man Ref Preload 193 12 54 Manual Mask 286 12 74 Manual Owner 298 12 75 manual reference sources 7 10 Maximum Freq 55 12 13 Maximum Speed 82 12 19 Maximum Voltage 54 12 13 Minimum Speed 81 12 18 model number identifying the drive using 2 2 MOP Frequency 11 12 7 MOP Rate 195 12 55 motor lead lengths 4 5 A 10 Motor NP FLA 42 12 9 Motor NP Hertz 43 12 10 Motor NP Power 45 12 10 Motor NP RPM 44 12 10 Motor NP Volts 41 12 9 Motor OL Count 220 12 67 Motor OL Factor 48 12 11 Motor OL Hertz 47 12 11 motor thermal overload about 12 9 protection 2 12 Motor Type 40 12 8 motor operated pot MOP 2 9 mounting drive clearances 3 6 flange mount 3 12 installation site requirements 3 5 matching input power 3 4 panel mount 3 12 unbalanced distribution systems 3 3 ungrounded distribution systems 3 3 MOV jumper 3 4 Mtr NP Pwr Units 46 12 10 Index Index 3 N NEMA enclosure ratings 2 3 to 2 6 network data transfer 2 12 modules
26. 0 0 Hz Analog Conf XXX XX01 XXX XX01 Anlg In 1 Hi 20 mA 20 mA Anlg In 1 Lo 4mA 4mA Anlg In 2 Hi 10V 10V Anlg In 2 Lo OV OV Dig In 1 Sel Stop Stop Dig In 2 Sel Start Start Dig In 3 Sel Function Loss Function Loss Dig In 4 Sel Jog Jog Dig In 5 Sel Manual Manual Dig In 6 Sel Speed Sel 1 Speed Sel 1 7 8 SP600 AC Drive User Manual NOILWYNDISANOO SAG LIiNVAAG SSO7 NOILONNA OWA O8b 08E LANdNI OV 9 sz ve s zz 12 02 6 e zi OL s v fer ar t Lt GAOL _1 __1 sto ee SS ANdiNO Ht LNANI INANI L lna 4 II scs se G RRR EE YNWST 2000 uai 20MWC0 inva GuYVOd I04LNO9 NIV o o o oanve WOO APE ON 113s 0334S NAYOLAV ip 98 DOF SSOTNOILONN o NOWWOO LAANI TYLI IA oo sLinv4 HvaTO dOLS 434 0292909 WIO 2907 06 JoJoweed dOLS LHVLS i NIO e007 68 JE OWeIed WIO 30w01 jeuondo 0 nd OV 009dS dd 3d M A N zagia L S HY l ZL LL 1 ann X90719 IYNINWY3L Q2MOd NOLLOAS HAMOd z uod Idd Figure 7 2 Wiring Diagram Default Drive Configuration 7 9 Installing Control Wiring 7 5 7 5 1 7 5 2 Speed Reference Control The following sections describe methods of obtaining the drive speed reference Auto Reference Sou
27. 11 3 Accessing the Parameters Important See chapter 9 for information on modifying parameters using the LCD OIM Parameters are programmed and viewed using the LCD OIM or VS Utilities software The LCD OIM displays parameters by group by individual parameter number and parameters that have changed from their default value To access parameters using the LCD OIM select the Parameters icon from the main screen See figure 11 2 See instruction manual D2 3488 for information on accessing and modifying parameters using VS Utilities software 2 Auto Stopped gt gt PO SP600 Main Menu A A E Parameters Monitor Lang elma eta _ gt gt Stopped Auto R PO SP600 Parameters P Numbers Changed Params File 2 Name ee ee a a v 2 gt gt Stopped PO SP600 Parameters By Group Changed Params J l 4 File 3 Name 4 ESC Parameter 456 78 Parameters By Group P Numbers Changed Params Parameter Text Unit Val Val Group 2 Name Group 3 Name Changed Par ll Searching Figure 11 2 Accessing the Parameters Using the LCD OIM
28. 133 PI preload Range 400 0 Hz 0 1 Hz Default 0 0 Hz Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Process PI See also 124 138 Sets the value used to load into the PI Integrator while the PI regulator is disabled This allows better dynamic starting performance at the time the regulator is enabled Refer to figure 12 16 PI_Config Pl_Status HT eo Enabled 134 PI Integrator Figure 12 16 PI Preload Value Parameter Descriptions 12 35 134 PI Status Range See figure 12 17 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Process PI See also 124 138 Displays the present state of the process PI regulator See parameter 125 for control of the PI regulator functions gt LS YAS NZ x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 1 Condition True 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 O Condition False g Nibble4 Nibble3 Nibble2 Nibble1 Reserved Bit Figure 12 17 PI Status 134 Bit 0 PI Enabled e Indicates whether or not the process PI loop is enabled Bit 1 PI Hold e Is set to 1 to indicate when a digital input is configured for PI Hold and is turned on or the PI Hold bit is set in PI Control 125 Bit 2 PI Reset e Is set to 1 to indicate when the PI Integrator is being reset to zero Bit 3 PI InLimit e Is set to 1 to indicate when the PI output equals positive limit or negative limit 135 PI Ref Meter Range 100 00 0 01 Defau
29. 320 Verify that correct terminals are used for configuration as voltage input or current input Incorrect input logic wiring Incorrect digital input programming e Mutually exclusive choices have been made e 2 wire and 3 wire programming may be conflicting Exclusive functions i e direction control may have multiple inputs configured Stop if factory default and is not wired or is open Start or Run programming may be missing Cause s See Dig In Status diagnostic parameter 216 Verify that the input is detected properly Program Digital In x Sel 361 366 to resolve conflicts Remove multiple selections for the same function Install stop button to apply a signal at stop terminal Check start inhibit status in Start Inhibits 214 Jog From OIM Corrective Action None Drive is programmed for 2 wire control and Logic Source Sel 89 All Ports OIM start and network start are disabled for 2 wire control If 2 wire control is required no action is necessary If 3 wire control is required program Digital In x Sel 361 366 for correct inputs Flashing or steady red Ready LED Active fault Reset fault Troubleshooting the Drive 13 19 Table 13 10 Drive Does Not Start or Jog From OIM Continued Indication Cause s Corrective Action Flashing yellow Ready LED Enable input is open Close termina
30. Description Table 13 6 Fault Descriptions and Corrective Actions Action Analog In Loss 29 Type An analog input is configured to fault on signal loss A signal loss has occurred Configure with Anlg In 1 2 Loss 324 327 1 Check parameters 2 Check for broken loose connections at inputs Anlg Cal Chksum 108 The checksum read from the analog calibration data does not match the checksum calculated Replace drive Auto Rsirt Tries 33 Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of Auto Rstrt Tries 174 Enable disable with Fault Config 1 238 Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear AutoTune Aborted 80 The autotune procedure was canceled by the user Restart procedure DB Resistance 69 Resistance of the internal DB resistor is out of range Replace resistor Troubleshooting the Drive 13 11 Table 13 6 Fault Descriptions and Corrective Actions Continued Fault g Description Action Decel Inhibit 24 The drive is not 1 Verify input voltage is following a commanded within drive specified deceleration because it limits is attempting to limit bus 2 Verify system ground voltage impedance follows proper grounding techniques 3 Disable bus regulation and or add dynamic brake resistor and or extend decelerat
31. E Ez 2 6 v8 OH O S G S 94 XxxZZO ZAZASO GrLZl cee Slvk zez rzi ESh zoz zel SLL G EL O 9L 2 9 B S O O E o r 0 S XXxxG1L0 ZAZdS9 Lep vse 29 vvb QOL 96 SOL ZL OLE zzi oti 9 s rs SL O a2 oe xxxx9d6 ZAZdS9 Z9 Ye Str Ozct O6 8 9 Bell EOL FZ 28 ooi ZT 9e LE SE Sb O S xxxxBd9 ZAZdS9 els SOZ zoe v9 8r evirZz os 8r By 9S ez oz SS 0 SZ 0 S2 0 OL XxxxZdp ZAZdS9 vile c6l gel eel rz EEE zz RETER EL bb sz 0lee0 Ze 0 90 xxxx2d2 zAZdS9 SHEM SREM SHEM 99S UW UOD 99S julu UOD DVA IVA OWA OVA MA dH M dH AeqwinNn spol IIOLL leuu eux Ove 802 ObZ 802 abuel4 y p d ind 9 peo ying Indul OYA Ove Idul OWA 80z Anq 10 Ana 10 YWAN L YWAN ZH t SSO7 SHEM sdwy VAN 0SL 0L L zZHJ p sdwy nd no yndu yndu s6uney JOMOd CUIWON SP600 AC Drive User Manual 2 4 Table 2 4 400 480 VAC Power Ratings a Ais Buunow jo ssajpseBes youlqed y OJ peyedissip eq IIM DUS SALIP U JO 1NN1S 01 U09 y Aq pe edissip SHEM US yeey y YBnosuy Aqoeuip payedissip SHEM LG sajeuesed Z saydeyo o 13431 selouenbe y Jel4e0 1 yply 104 ZL UUM AX a0e ded SeAUP ZL WINAN 404 Xp YUM ZA a7gide S P XP YWEN 104 LO UM saqwnu japow u Z eoe deu SOAP WISN 104
32. Fault Config 1 Analog In 1 Hi j Analog In 1 Lo Fault Clear Analog In 1 Loss Fault Clear Mode Analog In 2 Hi Power Up Marker Analog In 2 Lo Alarm Config 1 Drive Logic Rslt Analog In 2 Loss Anlg Out Absolut Drive Ref Rslt Analog Out Sel Drive Ramp Rslt Analog Outt Hi Manual Mask Stop Owner Analog Out1 Lo Digital In1 Sel Manual Owner Digital In2 Sel Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Digital In3 Sel Data In A2 Link A Word 2 Digital In4 Sel Data In B1 Link B Word 1 Digital In5 Sel Data In B2 Link B Word 2 Data In C1 Link C Word 1 Digital In6 Sel Digital Out1 Sel Data In C2 Link C Word 2 Dig Out1 Level Data In D1 Link D Word 1 Dig Out1 OnTime Data In D2 Link D Word 2 Dig Out OffTime Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 Digital Out2 Sel Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 Dig Out2 Level Data Out B1 Link B Word 1 Dig Out2 OnTime Data Out B2 Link B Word 2 Dig Out2 OffTime Po p po pol a a ol a pol pol pol pol plo Data Out C1 Link C Word 1 Data Out C2 Link C Word 2 Data Out D1 Link D Word 1 Data Out D2 Link D Word 2 Anlg In Config Anlg In Sqr Root PO OI PO PO POT PO POT PSO POT POT POT POT PSO PO PO PO PO PO DI DW PO DW MD DW PO DW PSO P PO 12 4 SP600 AC Drive Use
33. See figure 11 3 Parameter List 1 Standard Advanced Figure 11 3 Parameter Access Levels The Advanced level allows access to all of the parameters The Standard level allows access to a subset of the Advanced level and is used for more sophisticated applications than the Basic level The Basic level allows access to a subset of the Standard level and contains only the most commonly used parameters Table 11 1 and the parameter descriptions in chapter 12 provide the access level assigned to each parameter The active access level is displayed in Parameter Access Level 196 To select the parameter access level using the LCD OIM select the Password icon from the main menu See figure 11 4 This option is not supported in the VS Utilities software gt gt Stopped 2 Auto PO SP600 Main Menu Password 000 Basic U U U m 0 Set Acc Lvl PW gt Standard Set Wrt Prot PW Y Advanced Password Monitor Lang l l l 4 Highlight Password icon AIS Highlight option Select Figure 11 4 Selecting the Parameter Access Level Programming Basics 11 5 11 3 5 Using the Parameter Access Level Password to Restrict Access to Other Parameter Levels ATTENTION It is the user s responsibility to determine how to distribute the access level password Reliance Electric is not responsible for unauthorize
34. Specifies the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart when the auto restart feature is enabled The auto restart feature provides the ability for the drive to automatically perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application intervention Only certain faults are permitted to be reset see chapter 13 for a list and description of drive faults When the auto restart feature is enabled that is Auto Rstrt Tries is set to a value greater than zero and an auto resettable fault occurs the drive will stop After the number of seconds in Auto Restrt Delay 175 has elapsed the drive will automatically reset the faulted condition The drive will then issue an internal start command to start the drive If another auto resettable fault occurs the cycle will repeat up to the number of attempts specified in Auto Rstrt Tries 12 50 SP600 AC Drive User Manual If the drive faults repeatedly for more than the number of attempts specified in Auto Rstrt Tries with less than five minutes between each fault the drive will remain in the faulted state The fault Auto Rstrt Tries will be logged in the fault queue The auto restart feature is disabled when the drive is stopping and during autotuning Note that a DC Hold state is considered stopping The following conditions will abort the reset run process e Issuing a stop command from any control source Note that removal of a 2 wire ru
35. Table 4 4 I O Terminal Block Specifications Wire Size Range Description Maximum Minimum UO Terminal Block Signal and control 1 5 mm2 0 05mm2 0 5N m connections 16 AWG 30 AWG _ 4 4 in Ib T Maximum minimum that the terminal block will accept These are not recommendations 4 3 Recommended Motor Lead Lengths To reduce line disturbances and noise motor lead length should not exceed 200 feet for any non Reliance Electric motor or any non inverter duty motor Important The length of cable between the drive and motor may be limited for various application reasons The primary areas of concern are S Reflected wave e Cable charging Wiring Requirements for the Drive 4 5 When total lead length exceeds 200 feet nuisance trips can occur caused by capacitive current flow to ground Note that these capacitively coupled currents should be taken into consideration when working in areas where drives are running If the motor lead length must exceed these limits the addition of output line reactors see section 6 3 1 or other steps must be taken to avoid problems Your application may be restricted to a shorter lead length due to the type of wire shielded or unshielded S the placement of wire for example in conduit or a cable tray the type of line reactor S the type of motor voltage class 1000 V 1200 V or 1600 V e carrier frequency Figure 4 1 illustrates how to calculate motor lea
36. the Forward Reverse key has no effect 2 Reverse Dis The drive receives a signed reference 100 to 100 however regardless of the reference the drive is not permitted to reverse Parameter 190 Selection Analog Reference Direction Control 0 Unipolar 0 to 100 Logic 1 Bipolar 100 to 100 Reference polarity 2 Reverse Disable 100 to 100 Reverse disabled Note Internal reference scaling provides 100 32767 internal units Parameter Descriptions 12 53 192 Save OIM Ref Range See figure 12 25 Default See figure 12 25 Access 2 Path Utility gt OIM Ref Config See also Enables a feature to save the present frequency reference value issued by the OIM This value is saved to drive memory on power loss The value is then restored to the OIM on power up Nibble 4 Nibble 3 x Reserved x x x x x x x x re 14 13 12 1110 9 8 0 Do Not Save Bit Factory Default Bit Values Figure 12 25 Save OIM Ref 192 193 Man Ref Preload Range 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default 1 Enabled Access 2 Path Utility gt OIM Ref Config See also 320 327 361 366 Enables disables a feature to automatically load the present auto frequency reference value into the OIM when Manual is selected This allows smooth speed transition from Auto to Manual you can then adjust the manual speed setpoint starting from the transferred Auto spe
37. xxxzarzisaso vez 6z sit vt or oo et et szo ceo zeo so wxsdozisaso snem snem snem sas T uw L 1 uoo sdwy vay ma an ma dh poquny isso HEIL deiStp ereua adu ova na MSM MAU T and 10 vos png 10 won abuel4 paeds In 9 peo inj 27H t osduy yndjno sBuney 4 3M0Od BUIWON T VWAN L YWAN ZHA b SS07 SHEM SP600 AC Drive User Manual 2 6 2 4 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 4 3 Overview of SP600 Drive Features This section provides an overview of the features in the SP600 AC drive Analog Inputs There are two general purpose analog inputs that can be configured as either voltage 10 VDC or current 4 20 mA inputs using parameter 320 The analog inputs provide input signals that can be used to e Provide a value to Speed Ref A 91 e Provide a trim signal to Speed Ref A 91 Provide a reference when the terminal block has assumed manual control of the reference TB Man Ref Sel 96 e Provide the reference and feedback for the process PI loop PI Ref Sel 126 and PI Feedback Sel 128 Provide an external value for the current limit and DC braking level Current Limit Sel 147 and DC Brake Lvl Sel 157 Refer to the parameter descriptions in chapter 12 for more information about configuring the analog inputs Analog Output The drive has one analog output that can be used as a voltage signal 0 to 10 V to annunciate a wide variety of drive operating con
38. you are automatically advanced to the next step Important Parameter values are saved as they are changed Pressing or aborting the Start Up routine will not undo the changes 10 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual You do not have to configure all of the parameters in all 7 menus The first menu selection Quickstart contains the minimum basic parameters that must be configured before running the drive These parameters are listed in table 10 1 Parameter No Parameter Name Stop Mode A Table 10 1 Quickstart Parameters Default Ramp Motor NP FLA Drive dependent Minimum Speed 0 0 Hz Maximum Speed 60 0 Hz Accel Time 1 10 0 sec Decel Time 1 10 0 sec Speed Ref A Sel OIM Digital In2 Sel Start The drive s default configuration assumes the following e US Voltage Class 202 e Motor Nameplate Base Freq 43 60 Hz e Control Mode 53 Sensorless Vector Note The default start stop and reference control are configured for OIM operation Logic and reference sources 89 90 Local OIM If your application requires adjustment to parameters beyond those listed in table 10 1 you can adjust parameters individually through the Parameters menu see section 11 3 or you can adjust the parameters in any or all of the next 6 selections in the Start Up menu Input Voltages e 400 480 V 200 240 V or 575 V Motor Nameplate Data e Motor Power Units e Motor
39. 0 3 66 lt 94 2 3 71 gt lt 121 0 4 76 Frame C Frame D e 210 0 8 27 22 2 lt 108 0 4 25 gt 0 87 437 1 72 181 5 R 7 14 165 0 6 49 139 9 6 50 126 9 lt 108 0 4 25 _ gt ae 159 0 6 26 210 0 8 27 Frame E Dimensions in mm in Figure 3 6 SP600 IP20 Nema Type 1 Bottom View Dimensions Mounting the Drive 3 9 O i Y SI 55 2 2 17 31 0 1 22 77 3 3 04 gt 49 1 1 93 lt 99 6 3 92 gt 75 5 2 97 115 9 4 56 102 0 4 02 120 1 4 73 Frame B Frame D 22 5 0 89 lt 108 2 4 26 gt lt 157 7 6 21 _ gt lt 165 7 6 52 207 7 8 18 Frame E Dimensions in mm in Figure 3 7 SP600 IP66 NEMA Type 4X 12 Bottom View Dimensions 3 10 SP600 AC Drive User Manual lt 144 4 6 6 gt 22 2 0 87 Dia 22 2 0 87 Dia 60 3 2 37 ne 5 Places 4 Places 51 3 2 02 49 7 1 96 ar ae O oa 65 9 i A 414 1 63 te E lt 70 9 2 79 gt 59 6 2 35 gt S SR
40. 05 mm to 1 5 mm 30 AWG to 16 AWG Short circuit proof ESD protected 6 kV contact discharge 8 kV air discharge A 6 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table A 6 Control Inputs Outputs and Power Supplies Continued Six Digital Inputs Input voltage Logic thresholds Input resistance Isolation Assertion response hardware only Negation response hardware only Terminal block size Protection 24V nominal logic 0 Vin lt 3 2V logic 1 Vin gt 19 2V 2kQ 25V 9ms maximum ims maximum 0 05 mm to 1 5 mm 30 AWG to 16 AWG Short circuit proof ESD protected 6 kV contact discharge 8 kV air discharge Two Form C Relay Outputs Maximum Contact Voltage Contact rating for resistive loads Contact switching for resistive loads Contact rating for inductive loads Contact switching for inductive loads Isolation test voltage Terminal block size Protection 250VAC 220VDC 0 40 A at 125 VAC 2 A at 30 VDC 50 VA 60 W 0 20 A at 125 VAC 1 A at 30 VDC 25 VA 30 W 1900VDC for one minute 0 05 mm to 1 5 mm 30 AWG to 16 AWG Short circuit proof ESD protected 6 kV contact discharge 8 kV air discharge Technical Specifications Table A 7 Derating Guidelines SP600 Altitude and Efficiency Type Altitude Derate 1000 2000 xO 4000 5000 Alftude nm Efficiency typical 50 60 Spead Load SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table A 8 Derating Guid
41. 160 of rated output current Independently programmable proportional and integral gain A 4 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table A 5 Control Continued Electronic Motor Class 10 protection with speed sensitive Overload response Investigated by U L to comply with Protection N E C Article 430 U L File E59272 volume 12 Table A 6 Control Inputs Outputs and Power Supplies Analog Input 1 Differential Voltage Input Signal level Differential Input resistance Isolation Initial accuracy 25 C Resolution Input processing period Terminal block size Protection 0 to 10V 60kQ 17V 0 3 10 bits 0 1 5ms 0 05 mm to 1 5 mm 30 AWG to 16 AWG ESD protected 6 kV contact discharge 8 kV air discharge Analog Input 1 Differential Current Input Signal level Differential Input resistance Isolation Initial accuracy 25 C Resolution Input processing period Terminal block size Protection 0 4 to 20mA 1009 9V 0 3 10 bits 0 1 5ms 0 05 mm to 1 5 mm 30 AWG to 16 AWG ESD protected 6 kV contact discharge 8 kV air discharge Analog Input 2 Differential Voltage Input Signal level Differential Input resistance Isolation Initial accuracy 25 C Resolution Common Mode Rejection Ratio Input processing period Terminal block size Protection 10V to 10V 88kQ 165V 0 3 10 bits 0 1 70dB up to 500Hz over temperature range 5ms 0 05
42. 2 23 status LEDs 13 3 network modules 2 23 O OIM reference displaying and changing 9 11 OIM LCD cables 9 1 connections 9 1 display description 9 3 display timeout period setting 9 15 drive status parameters accessing 13 25 fast power up 9 6 fault parameters accessing 13 24 fault queue accessing 13 24 F Keys customizing 9 12 installing and removing 9 2 key descriptions 9 4 loading and saving user sets 9 8 logic and reference source selecting 9 17 menu structure 9 5 monitoring the drive 9 10 parameter access level selecting 11 5 parameters accessing 11 3 parameters viewing and adjusting 9 7 process display screen 9 10 product version determining 13 26 program protection selecting 11 7 removing 9 2 resetting the display 9 6 reverse video selecting 9 16 screen contrast adjusting 9 6 selecting a device 9 6 starting the drive 9 17 start up routines on 10 1 stopping the drive 9 17 troubleshooting the drive 13 23 version how to determine 13 27 viewing and adjusting parameters 9 7 operator interface remote 2 23 options communication 2 23 output analog 2 7 digital 2 7 output amps ratings 2 4 2 6 output contactors using 4 4 Output Current 3 12 5 Output Freq 1 12 5 Output Power 7 12 6 Output Powr Fctr 8 12 6 Output Voltage 6 12 6 output wiring installing 6 5 overcurrent protection drive 2 11 overload protection drive 2 11 motor 2 12 Ov
43. 22H p sdwy nding suey Jamog eUIWON 2 5 About the Drive Table 2 5 600 VAC Power Ratings 9IMS Burunow JO sse preBe JouIqed y O0 U Peyedissip aq IW PUe SALIP Y JO 1NJ N1S O WUOD U Aq peyedissip SHEM TUIS yeay y YBnosy Ajooulp payedissip SHEM G sajowered Z L sa deyo o 19491 SeloUanbay Jaleo JeYBIy 104 z ZL UUM AX 9791061 SOAUP ZL WINAN 104 XY ULM Z 9LJd 1 S AUP Xp VINAN 104 LO YM Jequunu jepow u Z 9ejd 1 SOAP WWAN 104 ssi ses spa zs sio zs z sey o op ze os xoxzeozisaso Loes eis eer v9 or m oze vee z oe oe op xoxivoz saso suer ver g9 vs sop ze vez eez set sz zz og xoxzeoz saso ere rz szee w ee zz eve cee ct oz ser sz aside gs ezr ezer ve esz zz soz ooze i s s oz xoxzzoz isaso gece zee vso ssz oe a es les sz o m st woxctoztcase esz oze eso a oe lu ee Tro ss sz sz ot xoxozisaso ez eve oom ser oe 6 zz og see s ss gz xxxodezisaso riz ze gee re zo vo sz ez oz e s soxaozisaso gee orz ovo es ev ee ry sp st z zz e xxedez isaso zo giz ger gp oe szl os ve or st st z xxxzazz saso ely eat ezz oz oz zt er oz oso seo seo 4
44. 53 must be set to SVC operation parameter 53 0 or 1 Autotune 61 must be reviewed to determine the appropriate method of autotuning 10 3 2 Operation Over Wide Speed Ranges gt 120 Hz The SP600 drive can operate at output frequencies of up to 400 Hz For wide speed ranges autotuning may not be able to accurately adapt to the motor dynamics Hardware overcurrent faults may occur and manual tuning may be necessary Consult technical support if this occurs 10 3 3 Start Stop Control The default configuration is for keypad control You can start and stop the drive from the local OIM See figure 10 3 F e F F1 a y lt gt l LA Ly N i Start Stop Start Stop NEMA 1 NEMA 4 Figure 10 3 Start Stop Control using the Local OIM To configure the drive for two wire or three wire Start Stop control you must configure a terminal block input to either the Run function 2 wire or Start function 3 wire See figure 10 4 and section 7 5 for I O wiring examples Starting Up the Drive Using the LCD OIM 10 5 Two Wire Start Stop Control 89 Logic Source Sel Terminal Block 361 Digital In1 Sel Not Used 362 Digital In2 Sel Run 363 Digital In3 Sel Function Loss Three Wire Start Stop Control 89 Logic Source Sel Terminal Block 361 Digital In1 Sel Stop 362 Digital In2 Sel Start 3
45. Adjust Each Parameter Type Parameter Type How to Adjust Numbered List Use AJY to advance through the list of options Bit Use K to move the cursor to the bit location you want to change Use AY to change the value of the bit Numeric pil lig Use AY to increase or decrease the value Or Use 41 K to move the cursor from digit to digit and use AY to increase or decrease the value of the digit To restore all parameters to their factory default values select Reset Defaults from the Memory Storage menu To see which parameters have been adjusted from their default values select Changed Params from the Parameters menu This procedure is described in section 13 8 4 of this manual Note that parameter values are retained through a line dip or power shutdown 9 7 2 Loading and Saving User Sets Up to three drive configurations called user sets can be saved and recalled for use at any time in the SP600 drive When the drive is shipped from the factory all user sets have the same factory default values Resetting the drive parameters to their default values does not affect the contents of the user sets Saving a User Set A user set can only be saved when the dynamic user set configure parameter 204 is programmed to disable Please refer to section 2 4 19 for more information To save the current drive configuration select Save to User Set from the Memory Storage menu Then select user set 1 2 o
46. Analog In Lo Analog In Hi 323 322 Figure 12 51 Analog Input Scaling Example Parameter Descriptions 12 81 323 Analog ln 1 Lo Range 4 000 to 20 000 mA 0 001 mA 10 000 V 0 001 V 0 000 to 10 000 V 0 001 V Default 4 000 mA Access 0 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs See also 91 92 320 Sets the lowest input value to the analog input 1 scaling block Refer to Analog In 1 Hi 322 for more information and a scaling example 324 Analog in 1 Loss Range 0 Disabled 1 Fault 2 Hold Input use last frequency command 3 Set Input Lo use Minimum Speed as frequency command 4 Set Input Hi use Maximum Speed as frequency command 5 Go to Preset1 use Preset 1 as frequency command 6 Hold OutFreq maintain last output frequency Default 0 Disabled Access 2 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs See also 91 92 190 Selects drive response when an analog signal loss is detected 1 6 V signal loss 1 9 V end of signal loss 3 2 mA signal loss 3 8 mA end of signal loss One of the selections 1 Fault stops the drive on signal loss All other choices make it possible for the input signal to return to a usable level while the drive is still running ATTENTION Setting parameter 324 to a value other than 1 allows the input signal to return to a usable level while the drive is running If a lost analog signal is restored while the drive is running the drive wil
47. Enabled Kez 121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 Disabled B x Bit 1 it l 1 DynUsrSetSel Factory Default Bit Values 0 Digital Inputs x Reserved Figure 12 28 Dyn UserSet Cnfg 205 DynUsrSetSel Co Range See figure12 29 Default See figure 12 29 Access 2 Path Utility gt Drive Memory See also 204 206 Controls which User Set is in memory when Ctrl Source bit 1 of DynUsrSetCnfg 204 is set to DynUsrSetSel Parameter Descriptions 12 59 Bit 0 UserSetBitO 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 1 UserSetBit1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Table 12 3 Dynamic User Set Mode UserSetBit1 UserSetBit0 UserSet Loaded in Memory 0 0 User Set 1 User Set 2 0 1 1 0 User Set 3 1 1 User Set 3 Y 0 1 Enabled 0 0 Disabled ble 2 Nibble 1 x Reserved S ojx x Bix C 152 IS x x x x x x x x x 15 14 13 12 1110 9 87 j Nibble 4 Nibble 3 Ni Bit Factory Default Bit Values Figure 12 29 DynUsrSetSel 206 Dyn UserSet Actv Range 0 Normal Mode Dynamic Mode Disabled 1 User Set 1 2 User Set 2 3 User Set 3 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Drive Memory See also 204 205 Displays which User Set was last loaded into active memory User parameter changes are allowed after a User Set is restored but will not be detected or annunciated 12 60 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 209 Drive St
48. FLA Speed Command gt Slip Comp Slip RPM Meter Speed Command gt Slip Comp Speed Mode Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Speed Ref A Hi Speed Command gt Speed References Speed Ref A Lo Speed Command gt Speed References Speed Ref A Sel Speed Command gt Control Src Select Speed Command gt Speed References Speed Ref Source Utility gt Diagnostics Start Inhibits Utility gt Diagnostics Start Acc Boost Motor Control gt Volts per Hertz Status 1 Fault Utility gt Diagnostics Status 2 Fault Utility gt Diagnostics Stop Mode A Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes Stop Mode B Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes Stop Owner Communication gt Masks amp Owners TB Man Ref Hi Speed Command gt Speed References TB Man Ref Lo Speed Command gt Speed References TB Man Ref Sel Speed Command gt Speed References Testpoint 1 Data Utility gt Diagnostics Testpoint 1 Sel Utility gt Diagnostics Testpoint 2 Data Utility gt Diagnostics Testpoint 2 Sel Utility gt Diagnostics Torque Current Monitor gt Metering B 6 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Parameter Name Torque Perf Mode Path File gt Group Motor Control gt Torq Attributes Trim Hi Speed Command gt Speed Trim Trim In Select Speed Commands gt Speed Trim Trim Lo Speed Command gt Speed Trim Trim Out Select
49. GF GG GH 2 Typical designations include Type CC KTK R FNQ R Type J JKS LPJ Type T JJS JJN Wiring Requirements for the Drive 4 9 Table 4 5 SP600 208 240 VAC Input Recommended Protection Devices Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Non time Delay Fuse Circuit Breaker Min 208 VAC Input Min Max Max 6SP201 2P2 0 33 6 6 6SP201 4P2 0 75 10 10 6SP201 6P8 1 5 15 15 6SP201 9P6 2 20 25 6SP201 015 3 20 35 6SP201 022 5 25 50 6SP201 028 7 5 35 70 6SP201 042 10 60 100 6SP201 054 15 80 125 6SP201 070 20 90 175 240 VAC Input 6SP201 2P2 0 33 4 4 5 6SP201 4P2 0 75 6 9 6SP201 6P8 1 5 15 15 6SP201 9P6 2 20 20 6SP201 015 3 20 30 6SP201 022 5 25 45 6SP201 028 7 5 35 60 6SP201 042 10 50 90 6SP201 054 15 60 6SP201 070 Circuit Breaker inverse t 20 Ratings shown are maximum 90 protection without nuisance tripping ime breaker For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown are
50. Lo 0 limit Analog Inx Hi 150 limit 12 38 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 148 Current Lmt Val Range Based on Drive Type 0 1 Amps Default Based on Drive Type approximately 150 of Drive Rated Amps Access 0 Path Dynamic Control gt Load Limits See also 147 149 Sets the current limit value when Current Lmt Sel 147 Cur Lim Val 149 Current Lmt Gain Range Oto 5000 1 Default 200 Access 2 Path Dynamic Control gt Load Limits See also 147 148 Sets the responsiveness of the current limit 150 Drive OL Mode Range 0 Disabled 1 Reduce CLim 2 Reduce PWM 3 Both PWM 1st Default 3 Both PWM 1st Access 1 Path Dynamic Control gt Load Limits See also 219 Selects the drive s response to increasing drive temperature The drive could reduce current limit PWM carrier or both A fault or alarm will also be activated when an overload is detected 151 CarrierFrequency Range 2 10kHz 1 kHz Default 4 kHz Access 0 Path Dynamic Control gt Load Limits Seealso 146 149 Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM output Drive derating may occur at higher carrier frequencies For derating information refer to Appendix A Parameter Descriptions 12 39 155 Stop Mode A 156 Stop Mode B Range 0 Coast 1 Ramp 2 Ramp to Hold 3 DC Brake Default 155 1 Ramp 156 0 Coast Access 155 0 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes 156 2 See also 157 159 361
51. See also 342 Selects whether the signed value or absolute value of a parameter is used before being scaled to drive the analog output See parameter 343 for specific signals that can be output N Ea S 9 Z gt x x x x x x x IS 0 Signe rls 14 13 12 11 10 9 x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Enabled Signal output range 0 to10 VDC Disabled Based output at 5 VDC for 0 output signal Signal Level Output Volts Figure 12 52 Anlg Out Absolute 341 342 Analog Out1 Sel Range 0 Output Freq 1 Command Freq 2 Output Amps 3 Torque Amps 4 Flux Amps 5 Output Power 6 Output Volts 7 DC Bus Volts 8 PI Reference 9 PI Feedback 10 PI Error 11 PI Output 12 Motor OL 13 Drive OL 14 Post Rmp Ref Default 0 Output Freq Access 1 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Outputs See also 1 7 12 135 138 219 220 343 Selects the source of the value that drives the analog output The analog output can be a voltage 0 10 VDC signal connected to terminals 22 and 23 See also Table 12 4 Parameter Descriptions 12 85 343 Analog Out1 Hi Range 0 00 to 10 00 Volts 0 01 Volt Default 10 00 Volts Access 1 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Outputs See also 342 Scales the analog output voltage at the source value maximum Scaling the Analog Output You define the scaling for the analog output
52. Short 102 UserSet2 Chksum Trnsistr OvrTemp 48 Params Defaulted 103 UserSet3 Chksum HW OverCurrent 63 Shear Pin 104 Pwr Brd Chksum1 Ground Fault 64 Drive Overload 105 Pwr Brd Chksum2 Decel Inhibit 69 DB Resistance 106 Incompat MCB PB OverSpeed Limit 70 Power Unit 107 Replaced MCB PB Analog In Loss 71 76 Port 1 6 Net Loss 108 Anlg Cal Chksum Auto Rstrt Tries 77 IR Volts Range SW OverCurrent 78 FluxAmpsRef Rang 1 Fault numbers not listed are reserved for future use 13 5 Test Point Codes and Functions Table 13 8 Test Point Codes and Functions Code Selected in Function Whose Value is Displayed Testpoint x Sel 234 236 in Testpoint x Data 235 237 DPI Error Status Heatsink Temperature Active Current Limit Active PWM Frequency Lifetime MegaWatt Hours Lifetime Run Time Lifetime Powered Up Time Lifetime Power Cycles oloNIO Qn EG MM Life MegaWatt Hours Fraction Life MegaWatt Hours Fraction Units Reserved for Factory Use 1 Use the equation below to calculate total Lifetime MegaWatt Hours Value of Code 9 Value of Code 10 x 0 1 Value of Code 5 Total Lifetime MegaWatt Hours Troubleshooting the Drive 13 17 13 6 Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions Table 13 9 Drive Does Not Start From Start Run or Jog Inputs Wired to the Indication s Terminal Block Cause s Drive is faulted Corrective Action Clear fault e Press OIM Stop key
53. Voltage Skip Freq Band DC Bus Memory Logic Source Sel Analog In1 Value Speed Ref A Sel Analog In2 Value Speed Ref A Hi Rated kW Speed Ref A Lo Rated Volts TB Man Ref Sel Rated Amps TB Man Ref Hi Control SW Ver TB Man Ref Lo Motor Type Jog Speed Motor NP Volts Preset Speed 1 Motor NP FLA Preset Speed 2 Motor NP Hertz Preset Speed 3 Motor NP RPM Preset Speed 4 Motor NP Power Preset Speed 5 Mtr NP Pwr Units Preset Speed 6 Motor OL Hertz Preset Speed 7 Motor OL Factor Trim In Select Torque Perf Mode Trim Out Select Maximum Voltage Trim Hi Maximum Freq Trim Lo Compensation Slip RPM FLA Flux Up Mode Slip Comp Gain Flux Up Time Slip RPM Meter Autotune PI Configuration IR Voltage Drop PI Control Flux Current Ref PI Reference Sel Read Only Parameter oOo M ONINI PO PO POT POT NI NINI mA mM mt N Or O O Oaa DO S SH ehe DY OGO OC aar G LO POP PO POT PSO PO POT PE POT POT POT PO PET POT POT MI M O o Kl o OPP POT POT PO PO l O POT P PO LP 12 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table 12 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Name PI Setpoint Parameter Name Direction Mode oO PI Feedback Sel Save OIM Ref PI Integral Time Man Ref Preload PI Prop Gain Save MOP Ref PI Lower Limit PI Upper Limit MOP Rate Param Access Lv
54. all hardware installation as described in chapters 3 through 8 of this manual e properly connect the drive to the motor Starting Up the Drive Using the LCD OIM 10 1 10 2 Running the Start Up Routines To access the Start Up routines select the Start Up icon from the main menu as shown in figure 10 1 gt gt Stopped ry Auto PO SP600 Main Menu JAE Start Up Monitor Lang lt gt Highlight Start Up icon Select Figure 10 1 Accessing the Start Up Routines The Start Up menu screen contains 8 selections The first 7 menu items contain the most commonly used parameters associated with each function See figure 10 2 Main Menu art Up E s Intro Press J v r s P Input L Motor Motor Speed Lf Configure Quickstart gt Voltage Data Tests N Limits Ref setup VO Se A X J X X E x 7 N E l l 1 l 1 l 1 Set basic Configure ar Enter Motor Optimize Set Min Max Set Set TB LO parameters Alternate Nameplate Torque and Speed Stop Reference Functions Data Verify Direction Mode and Control Input Voltage irecti Direction Conrol Source ra N aa Noe R a Figure 10 2 Start Up Menu The Start Up routine automates the process of entering values of selected parameters by taking you to the next parameter after you accept a parameter value As each item in the list is completed
55. and this instruction manual number Also please have your product version number ready refer to chapter 13 Introduction 1 1 1 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual About the Drive The SP600 AC drive is a pulse width modulated PWM drive that provides general purpose sensorless vector or volts hertz regulation for a broad range of applications requiring adjustable speed control of motors This chapter provides information about the SP600 AC drive including e Information on identifying the drive e Descriptions of NEMA ratings e Descriptions of features S Information on CE filters and requirements for CE compliance e A description of drive connections and communication options About the Drive 2 1 2 1 Identifying the Drive by Model Number Each SP600 AC drive can be identified by its model number as shown in figure 2 1 The model number is on the shipping label and the drive nameplate The model number includes the drive and any factory installed options Model numbers and drive power ratings are provided in table 2 1 P201 2P2BTNN 6SP SP600 2 200 240 V 4 380 480 V 5 575 600 V Reserved Always N 01 NEMA 1 4X NEMA 4X 12 NEMA 12 1F NEMA 1 Flange A Filter 240 VAC N Not Rated 2P2 2 2 A 0 5 HP 0 37 kW f z 1 0 HP 0 75 kW __ T Transistor 8 A 2 0 HP 1 5 kW N None 3 0 HP 2 2 kW 5 0 HP 4 0 kw B Blank OIM 7 5 HP 5 5 kW C LED OIM 10 0 HP 7
56. at the rate specified in Accel Time 1 140 Accel Time 2 141 Decel Time 1 142 and Decel Time 2 143 Be aware that an abrupt speed change may occur depending upon the new reference level and the rate specified in these parameters Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Parameters 89 Logic Source Sel and 90 Ref Source Sel are used to select the drive control and speed reference sources These parameters are grouped in the Control Src Select menu See figure 9 15 Ta TRT Aaa Main Menu A Control Src Sel lt q gt Highlight Control Src Sel icon Figure 9 15 Selecting the Control and Reference Source Both of these parameters can also be accessed individually through the Parameters menu Refer to chapter 12 for a description of the parameters Starting the Drive When the OIM is the selected control source pressing _1_ issues a start command to the drive Stopping the Drive Pressing CO will issue a stop command to the drive Important Stop commands from any attached OIM will always be enabled Using the LCD OIM 9 17 9 9 4 Changing Motor Direction When the OIM is the selected control source pressing IC toggles motor direction When IC is pressed the motor ramps down to 0 Hz and then ramps up to the set speed in the opposite direction If the drive is running when the direction is changed the reference to the motor chan
57. by entering analog output voltages into Analog Out1 Lo and Analog Out1 Hi These two output voltages correspond to the bottom and top of the possible range covered by the quantity being output The output voltage will vary linearly with the quantity being output The analog output voltage will not go outside the limits defined by Analog Out1 Lo and Analog Out 1 Hi See table 12 4 Table 12 4 Analog Output Scaling Options Analog Outi Lo 344 Value Corresponds to Analog Out1 Hi 343 Analog Out Absolut 341 Analog Out Absolut 341 Value Corresponds to Disabled Enabled Output Freq Maximum Freq 0 Hz Maximum Freq Commanded Freq Maximum Speed 0 Hz Maximum Speed Output Amps 0 Amps 0 Amps 200 Rated Torque Amps 200 Rated 0 Amps 200 Rated Flux Amps 0 Amps 0 Amps 200 Rated Output Power 0 kW 0 W 200 Rated Output Volts 0 Volts 0 Volts 120 Rated DC Bus Volts 0 Volts 0 Volts 200 Rated PI Reference 100 0 100 PI Feedback 100 0 100 PI Error 100 0 100 PI Output 100 0 100 Motor OL 0 0 100 Drive OL 0 0 100 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 344 Analog Outi Lo Range 0 00 to 10 00 Volts 0 01 Volts Default 0 00 Volts Access 1 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Outputs See also 342 343 Scales the analog output voltage at the source value minimum Refer to Analog Out1 Hi 343 for more information 12 86 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 361 Digital In1 Sel S
58. calculate the voltage drop across the stator resistance and directly enter these values into the Flux Current and IR Voltage Drop parameters Refer to the description of the Autotune parameter 61 in chapter 12 for more information about using this feature 2 10 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 2 4 12 Drive Protection Current Limit There are six ways that the drive protects itself from overcurrent or overload situations Instantaneous overcurrent trip e Software instantaneous trip Software current limit e Heatsink temperature protection e Overload protection see Drive Overload Protection section 2 4 13 Thermal manager 2 4 13 Drive Overload Protection The drive thermal overload protects the drive power stage while maintaining performance as long the drive temperature and current ratings are not exceeded The drive monitors the temperature of the power module based on a measured temperature and a thermal model of the IGBT As the temperature rises the drive may lower the PWM frequency to decrease the switching losses in the IGBT If the temperature continues to rise the drive may reduce current limit to try to decrease the load on the drive If the drive temperature becomes critical the drive generates a fault If the drive is operated in a low ambient condition the drive may exceed rated levels of current before the monitored temperature becomes critical To guard against this situation the drive thermal over
59. can result if this procedure is not followed Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury To verify the condition of the installation Step 1 Turn off lock out and tag the input power to the drive Wait five minutes Step 2 Verify that the DC bus voltage is zero See section 13 1 Step 3 If a function loss coast stop pushbutton has been installed verify that it has been wired correctly Step 4 Remove any debris such as metal shavings from around the drive Step 5 Check that there is adequate clearance around the drive Step 6 Verify that there is nothing mounted behind the drive Completing the Installation 8 1 8 2 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Verify that the wiring to the terminal strip and the power terminals is correct Check that the wire size is within terminal specification and that the terminals are tightened properly Check that user supplied branch circuit protection is installed and correctly rated Check that the incoming power is rated correctly Check the motor installation and length of motor leads Disconnect any power correction capacitors connected between the drive and the motor Check that the rating of the transformer if used matches the drive requirements and is connected properly Verify that a properly sized ground wire is installed and a suitable earth ground is used Check for and elimi
60. cross coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury Power Terminal Block SHLD Terminal Suggested entry for incoming line wiring Suggested entry for motor wiring UO Terminal Block Signal and Control Suggested entry for communication wiring Suggested entry for I O and control wiring 1090 0 00 0 0 Cable Entry Plate Figure 5 1 Typical Wire Routing and Terminal Block Locations 5 HP Drive Shown Important Use the plugs supplied with IP66 NEMA Type 4X 12 rated drives to seal unused holes in the cable entry area 5 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 5 2 Grounding the Drive ATTENTION The user is responsible for conforming with all applicable local national and international codes Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment The drive Safety Ground PE terminal must be connected to system ground Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes The integrity of all ground connections should be periodically checked For installations within a cabinet a single safety ground point or ground bus bar connected directl
61. drive and to troubleshoot problems that may occur e Ready LED on the drive cover e User configurable and non configurable alarms e User configurable and non configurable faults e Entries in the fault queue e Drive status parameters 13 1 Verifying that DC Bus Capacitors are Discharged Before Servicing the Drive ATTENTION DC bus capacitors retain hazardous voltages after input power has been disconnected After disconnecting input power wait five 5 minutes for the DC bus capacitors to discharge and then check the voltage with a voltmeter to ensure the DC bus capacitors are discharged before touching any internal components Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life The drive s DC bus capacitors retain hazardous voltages after input power has been disconnected Perform the following steps before touching any internal components Step 1 Turn off and lock out input power Wait 5 minutes Step 2 Remove the drive s cover Step 3 Verify that there is no voltage at the drive s input power terminals Step 4 Measure the DC bus potential with a voltmeter while standing on a non conductive surface and wearing insulated gloves Refer to figure 13 1 Troubleshooting the Drive 13 1
62. eee eee eee 2 24 Figure 3 1 Typical Jumper Locations C Frame Shown sese eee 3 3 Figure 3 2 Phase to Ground MOV Removal sees sese eee ee eee 3 4 Figure 3 3 Minimum Mounting Clearances sss sese eee eee eee eee eee 3 6 Figure 3 4 Panel Mount Drive Dimensions aseeseen 3 7 Figure 3 5 Flange Mount Drive Dimensions sese eee eser eee eee eee 3 8 Figure 3 6 SP600 IP20 Nema Type 1 Bottom View Dimensions 3 9 Figure 3 7 SP600 IP66 NEMA Type 4X 12 Bottom View Dimensions 3 10 Figure 3 8 SP600 Flange Mount Bottom View Dimensions 3 11 Figure 3 9 A Frame Flange Mount Cutout Dimensions sse eee 3 12 Figure 3 10 B Frame Flange Mount Cutout Dimensions 3 13 Figure 3 11 C Frame Flange Mount Cutout Dimensions sees sees 3 13 Figure 3 12 D Frame Flange Mount Cutout Dimensions sss sees e 3 14 Figure 3 13 E Frame Flange Mount Cutout Dimensions 00 3 14 Figure 4 1 How to Calculate Motor Lead Lengha esse sese eee eee eee 4 6 Figure 4 2 Inverter and Motor Line to line Voltages 4 7 Figure 4 3 Motor Overvoltage as a Function of Cable Length 4 8 Figure 5 1 Typical Wire Routing and Terminal Block Locations 5 HP Drive SHOW 2 asz esei eate taenn a 7 fanc nsis 5 2 Figure 5 2 Typical Grounding sss sss eee eee 5 3 Figure 5 3 Single Point Grounding Panel Layout sss eee 5 3 Figure 6 1 Removi
63. equal to current limit so that full flux can be established in the motor prior to acceleration 0 Manual Flux is established for Flux Up Time 58 before acceleration The flux up time can be a user value set in parameter 58 1 Auto Flux is established for a calculated time period based on motor nameplate data Flux Up Time 58 is not used 12 14 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 58 Flux Up Time Range 0 00 to 5 00 Sec 0 01 Sec Default 0 0 Sec Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Torq Attributes See also 53 58 Sets the amount of time the drive will apply DC current to the motor to achieve stator flux When a start command is issued DC current equal to current limit level is used to build stator flux before accelerating 61 Autotune Range 0 Ready Co 1 Static Tune 2 Rotate Tune 3 Calculate Default 3 Calculate Access 0 Path Motor Control gt Torg Attributes See also 53 62 63 Enables a manual or automatic method for setting IR Voltage Drop 62 and Flux Current Ref 63 These values will affect sensorless vector performance Valid only when Torque Perf Mode 53 is set to Sensrls Vect or SV Economize 0 Ready The parameter returns to this setting following a Static Tune or Rotate Tune It also permits manually setting IR Voltage Drop 62 and Flux Current Ref 63 1 Static Tune A temporary command that initiates a non rotational motor stator resistance test for the best possible automatic
64. if that OIM is control source Cycle power Set Fault Clear 240 to 1 Toggle terminal block stop or terminal block reset digital input if terminal block is the control source Incorrect operation from the terminal block Incorrect input wiring e 2 wire control requires Run Run Forward or Run Reverse input s 3 wire control requires Start and Stop inputs Jumper from terminal 7 to 8 is required Wire inputs correctly and or install jumper Incorrect digital input programming e Mutually exclusive choices have been made 2 wire and 3 wire programming may be conflicting Exclusive functions i e direction control may have multiple inputs configured Stop if factory default and is not wired or is open Start or Run programming may be missing Program Digital In x Sel 361 366 for correct inputs Logic Source Sel is not set to Terminal BIk Set Logic Source Sel to Terminal Blk 13 18 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table 13 9 Drive Does Not Start From Start Run or Jog Inputs Wired to the Terminal Block Continued Indication s Cause s Corrective Action Incorrect operation from the terminal block cont d Flashing yellow Ready LED and Digin CflctB indication on LCD OIM Drive Status 2 210 shows type 2 alarm s Table 13 10 Drive Does Not Start or Indication Analog input does not work See Anlg In Config
65. initiated the most recent stop command It will be cleared set to 0 during the next start sequence 216 Dig In Status Range See figure12 35 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs See also 361 366 Displays the current state of the digital inputs on the terminal block x x x x x x x x x x 1 Input Present 15 1413 12 1110 9 817 6 0 Input Not Present g Nibble4 Nibble3 Nibble2 Nibble1 Reserved Bit Function Terminal Digital In1 Digital In2 Digital In3 Digital In4 Digital In5 Digital In6 Figure 12 35 Dig In Status 216 Parameter Descriptions 12 65 217 Dig Out Status Range See figure12 36 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs See also 380 384 Displays the current state of the digital outputs x x x x x x x x 1 Output Energized 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0 Output De energized uessa Nibbles Ni i x Reserved Bit Function Taa Digital Out1 Relay 1 NO 11 12 Relay 1 NC 12 13 Digital Out2 Relay 2 NO 24 25 Relay 2 NC 25 26 Figure 12 36 Dig Out Status 217 218 Drive Temp Range 100 degC 0 1 degC Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also Displays the present operating temperature o
66. line fuses circuit breakers specified in section 4 4 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 3 1 1 1 Unbalanced or Ungrounded Distribution Systems ATTENTION SP600 drives contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground To guard against drive damage these devices should be disconnected if the drive is installed on an ungrounded distribution system where the line to ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125 of the nominal line to line voltage Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION To avoid electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before removing installing jumpers Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC terminal of the Power Terminal Block and the DC test point The voltage must be zero To disconnect the MOVs and common mode capacitors remove the jumper s shown in figures 3 1 and 3 2 and table 3 1 nf G h TEE loo00000000000 oo000000000 Ed L o o Figure 3 1 Typical Jumper Locations C Frame Shown Mounting the Drive 3 3 Table 3 1 MOV and Common Mode Capacitor Jumpers Common Mode Capacitors See
67. manual mode select and logic select of OIM Control can override the reference control source See figure 12 10 ATTENTION Removing and replacing the LCD OIM while the drive is running may cause an abrupt speed change if the LCD OIM is the selected reference source but is not the selected control source The drive will ramp to the reference level provided by the OIM atthe rate specified in Accel Time 1 140 Accel Time 2 141 Decel Time 1 142 and Decel Time 2 143 Be aware that an abrupt speed change may occur depending upon the new reference level and the rate specified in these parameters Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Parameter Descriptions 12 23 Speed Re Sel 90 1 Analog in 1 gt oe on ee ie Ref A Presets Analog In 2 Mor gE Preset 1 Preset 2 Preset 3 Preset 4 Preset 5 Preset 6 Parameters 361 366 can be configured to select presets 1 7 If any terminal is selected to be a preset and it is activated then it will Preset 7 o o overide the Speed Ref A 90 selection Local OIM Remote DPI OIM Port 2 Remote DPI OIM Port 3 Network Note This diagram applies to all reference selection parameters Figure 12 10 Reference Selection 91 Speed Ref A Hi Range
68. module for proper stopped connection to external communicating network The fault code indicates 2 Check external wiring to the offending port module on port number 71 port 1 3 Verify external network etc fault Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage Monitor the incoming AC remained below 85 of line for low voltage or line nominal for longer than power interruption Power Loss Time 185 Enable disable with Fault Config 1 238 Power Unit 70 One or more of the 1 Check for damaged output transistors were output transistors operating in the active 2 Replace drive region instead of l l desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage Pwr Brd 104 The checksum read Clear the fault or cycle Chksum1 from the EEPROM does power to the drive not match the checksum calculated from the EEPROM data Pwr Brd 105 The checksum read 1 Cycle power to the Chksum2 from the board does not drive maa es checksum 12 If problem persists aicu atea replace drive Replaced 107 Main Control board was 1 Restore defaults MCB PB replaced and 2 Reprogram parameters parameters were not programmed Shear Pin 63 Programmed Current Check load requirements Lmt Val 148 has been and Current Lmt Val 148 exceeded setting Enabled disable with Fault Config 1 238 Troubleshooting the Drive 13 15 Table 13 6 Fault Descriptions and Correct
69. observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life ATTENTION The drive can operate at and maintain zero speed The user is responsible for assuring safe conditions for operating personnel by providing suitable guards audible or visual alarms or other devices to indicate that the drive is operating or may operate at or near zero speed Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss or life ATTENTION The drive contains ESD Electrostatic Discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing the drive Erratic machine operation and damage to or destruction of equipment can result if this procedure Is not followed Failure to observe this precaution can result in bodily injury ATTENTION The user must provide an external hardwired emergency stop circuit outside of the drive circuitry This circuitry must disable the system in case of improper operation Uncontrolled machine operation may result if this procedure is not followed Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury ATTENTION The user is responsible for conforming with all applicable local and national codes Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment SP600 VS Utilities and Reliance are trademarks of Rockwell Automation 2004 Rockwell Automation All
70. producing current is reduced but only if the total drive output current does not exceed 75 of motor rated current In this mode the flux current is not allowed to be less than 50 of the selected flux current parameter value 2 4 27 Fan Curve 2 5 When Torque Perf Mode 53 is set to Fan Pump V Hz the relationship between frequency and voltage is a square function where the voltage is proportional to frequency The fan curve provides the option to generate voltage that is a function of the stator frequency squared up to the motor nameplate frequency Above base frequency the voltage is a linear function of frequency At low speed the fan curve can be offset by the Run Boost 70 parameter to provide necessary starting torque CE Conformity Some SP600 drive models contain input line filters and DC bus chokes These components are essential to meet CE certification requirements These SP600 drives are CE compatible but internal or external filters will be required to meet the standards outlined in section 2 5 1 Conformity with the Low Voltage LV Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European Norm EN standards published in the Official Journal of the European Communities The SP600 AC drive complies with the EN standards listed below when installed according to the user manual CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at http Awww reliance com certificat
71. rights reserved Introduction 1 1 1 2 Manual Conventions sese eee eee 1 1 Getting Assistance from Reliance Electric 1 1 About the Drive 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 Identifying the Drive by Model Number sss sss 2 2 Identifying the Drive by Frame SIze sese eee ee eee 2 3 Power Enclosure Ratings Overview of SP600 Drive Features eee eee 2 4 1 Analog INPUTS skierien aaaeeeaa tsina 2 4 2 Analog OUIpUL sees eee 2 4 3 Digital Ous ee eee eee 2 4 4 Multiple Control Modes 2 4 5 Multiple Stop MethodS sss 2 4 6 Multiple Speed Control Methods sss sees 2 4 7 Auto Manual Reference Selection 2 4 8 Seven Preset Frequency Setpoints 2 4 9 Motor Operated Potentiometer MOP Function 2 9 2 4 10 Auto Restart ReSet RUN see eee eee 2 4 1 7 AUtOtune is hk iel dein ied eh Eee 2 4 12 Drive Protection Current Limit 2 4 13 Drive Overload Protection 4 2 4 14 Motor Overload Protection 2 4 15 Shear Pin Eau 2 4 16 Drive Peripheral Interface DPD sss sese 2 4 17 Network Data Transfer via Datalinks 2 4 18 Programmable Parameter Access Levels and Protection siori Ried din ieee 2 4 19 User Sets eee 2 4 19 1Normal Mode sss sss seene 2 4 19 2Dynamic Mode 2 4 20 Process PI LOOP essen 24 21 S el ieia acs Ree a eve eevee 2 4 22 Three Skip Bands Avoidance Frequencies 2 16 2 4 23 FlYINg Rl O 2 4 24 Voltage Class see 2 4 25 Motor Cable Lengths 2 4 26 E
72. section 9 8 Refer to chapter 10 X Refer to chapter 11 Changed Params __ Refer to section 13 8 Control Src Logic Source Sel i elt el gt section A Speed Ref A Sel 9 9 4 P View Fault Queue Das Ka Device Version beL OIM Version Refer to d Fault Info gt section L Status Info 13 8 Device Items 4 P Tech Support J E x Language a Display Monitor let Function Keys GRENG ggo N i 7100 jJ E gt Device Identity m eoum Y Display Timeout 9 8 Display Video 4 P Reset Display S Refer to Fast PwrUp Mode section Contrast 9 5 Memory Reset Defaults Storage Save to User Set Fister to fi 5 Load Frm Usr Set Section V Active User Set J k 4 E Davice l Menu options gt Refer to N dependentupon gt section me 7 devices connected 9 6 A K A 4 E to move between Press 4 E icons to move between nae Set Access Lvl Refer to Pesa k Y menu items n Set Acc Lvl PW gt chapter L Set Wrt Prot PW 11 Press to select a menu item Logout n to move 1 level back in 4 2 Press e the menu structure Figure 9 4 LCD OIM Menu Structure Using the LCD OIM 9 5 Powering Up and Adjusting the LCD OIM The first time the LCD OIM is powered up you will be prompted to select a language for the display text If the Start Up routine has not been completed the Start Up menu is displayed immediately following the language selection screen On subs
73. sese 13 21 Table 13 13 Motor and or Drive Will Not Accelerate to Commanded Speed sss sese 13 21 Table 13 14 Motor Operation is Unstable sese eee 13 21 Table 13 15 Drive Will Not Reverse Motor Direction 13 22 Table 13 16 Stopping the Drive Results in a Decel Inhibit Fault 13 22 Table 13 17 OIM Cables sese eee nere 13 23 Table 13 18 NEMA 4 Covers seene 13 23 X SP600 AC Drive User Manual 1 1 1 2 Introduction This manual is intended for qualified electrical personnel familiar with installing programming and maintaining AC drives This manual contains information on S Installing and wiring the SP600 drive Programming the drive S Troubleshooting the drive The latest version of this manual is available from http www reliance com literature literature_main html Manual Conventions Parameter names In most instances parameter names are shown as the parameter name followed by the parameter number For example PI Control 125 Getting Assistance from Reliance Electric If you have any questions or problems with the products described in this instruction manual contact your local Reliance Electric sales office For technical assistance call 1 864 284 5444 Before calling please review the troubleshooting section of this manual and check the standard drives website for additional information When you call this number you will be asked for the drive model number
74. t User Set 3 Figure 2 2 Normal Mode Operation 2 4 19 2Dynamic Mode Dynamic Mode Operation allows User Sets to be loaded by utilizing digital input states or by writing a value to a user set select parameter 205 In this mode the active area will no longer exchange data with any User Set but the operating memory will be directly loaded with any one of the three User Sets Important User Sets must be properly setup in Normal Mode before they can be loaded and used in Dynamic Mode The method of writing the user set select parameter 205 value will allow a communications network to control which User Set is in use Digital inputs can be configured to allow local control of User Sets from the drive s Terminal Block Up to two digital inputs can be defined to allow selection of any combination of the three User Sets Digital Inputs can be configured through Parameters 361 through 366 The Dynamic Mode Operation User Set operation is enabled and disabled by a configuration parameter 204 Important Parameter writes are only recorded in the operating memory and not copied to non volatile storage Changes made to parameter values while Dynamic Mode is active will not be saved Parameter changes or power loss while Dynamic Mode is disabled Normal Mode will still automatically save changed data to active area non volatile storage Loading of User Set data to operating memory can occur only while the drive is in a s
75. the password is enabled you will also be prompted to enter the password to access the Set Acc Lvl PW option This option is not supported in the VS Utilities software If There is More Than One OIM Connected to the Drive Note that setting or changing the access level password on one OIM will set or change the access level password for all OIMs connected to the drive SP600 AC Drive User Manual 11 4 Using the Write Protect Password to Ensure Program Security ATTENTION It is the user s responsibility to determine how to distribute the write protect password Reliance Electric is not responsible for unauthorized access violations within the user s organization Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Parameter values can be password protected using the LCD OIM When the password is enabled parameter values can be displayed However if there is an attempt to change a parameter value a password pop up box will appear on the OIM screen to prompt for the user defined password To set the write protect password select the Password icon from the main menu See figure 11 6 The password value can range from 1 to 9999 A value of 0 disables the password factory default When the password is enabled the lock symbol on the screen changes from f tog gt gt Stopped 2 PO SP600 Main Menu Password Set Wrt Prot PW Q DD oou Set Access Lvl New Code
76. the terminal block input assigned to the OIM control function overrides parameter 89 You can switch control from the terminal block to the OIM by configuring Digital Inx Sel 361 366 to the OIM control function This switching will affect logic control and the speed reference source Refer to the parameter 361 366 description for detail G Terminal ii Block gt oF gt Control Functions RUN gt pa Local OIM o oe START JOG Remote DPI o are OIM Eon DIRECTION gt CLEAR Rn p Pho Fars gt gt sToP gt pa Network comm A Logic Source Note All Ports allows Sel 89 parallel control of devices Figure 12 9 Logic Source Sel 89 12 22 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 90 Speed Ref A Sel ra Range 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 8 Reserved 9 MOP Level 10 Reserved 11 Preset Spd 1 12 Preset Spd 2 13 Preset Spd 3 14 Preset Spd 4 15 Preset Spd 5 16 Preset Spd 6 17 Preset Spd 7 18 Local OIM 19 DPI Port 2 20 DPI Port 3 21 Reserved 22 Network 23 Reserved Default 18 Local OIM Access 0 Path Speed Command gt Speed References Speed Command gt Control Src Select See also 2 91 92 101 107 117 120 192 194 213 272 273 361 366 320 327 Selects the source of the speed reference to the drive unless Preset Speed 1 7 101 107 is selected Note that the
77. to 100 00 0 01 Default Based on Drive Type Access 1 Path Motor Control gt Motor Data See also 46 Set to the motor nameplate rated power The motor nameplate power is used with the other nameplate values to calculate default values for motor parameters to assist the commissioning process This may be entered in horsepower or in kilowatts as selected in parameter 46 46 Mtr NP Pwr Units Range 0 Horsepower 1 kiloWatts Default Based on Drive Type Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Motor Data See also Set to the power units shown on the motor nameplate This parameter determines the units for parameter 45 12 10 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 47 Motor OL Hertz com Range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Default Motor NP Hz 3 Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Motor Data See also 42 220 Sets the output frequency below which the motor operating current is derated This allows the motor thermal overload to generate a fault below rated current Note that for all settings of overload Hz other than 0 0 the overload capacity is reduced to 70 when output frequency is zero Changing Overload Hz to G OL Hz lt 10 OL HZ lt 25 OL Hz 50 D o 3 S L S i fo o 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 400 Hertz Figure 12 1 Motor OL Hertz 47 48 Motor OL Factor Co Range 0 20 to 2 00 0 01 Default 1 00 Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Motor Data See also 42 220
78. when power is applied to the drive and de energize drop out when a fault or alarm exists Relays selected for other functions will energize only when that condition exists and will de energize when the condition is removed 2Activation level is defined in Dig Out x Level 381 385 Selects the drive status that will energize an output relay relay terminals 11 12 and 13 1 Fault A fault has occurred and stopped the drive 2 Alarm A Type 1 or Type 2 alarm condition exists 3 Ready The drive is powered Enabled and no start inhibits exist It is ready to run 4 Run The drive is outputting voltage and frequency to the motor indicates 3 wire control either direction 5 Forward Run The drive is outputting voltage and frequency to Parameter Descriptions 12 95 the motor indicates 2 wire control in forward 6 Reverse Run The drive is outputting voltage and frequency to the motor indicates 2 wire control in reverse 7 Auto Restart The drive is currently executing the Auto Restart or Run at Power Up function 8 Reserved 9 At Speed The output frequency equals or exceeds the commanded speed 10 At Freq The drive output frequency equals or exceeds the programmed limit Also see Dig Out1 Level 381 Dig Out OnTime 382 and Dig Out1 OffTime 383 11 At Current The drive total output current exceeds the programmed limit 12 At Torque The drive output torq
79. 0 Jog 18 Auto Manual 15 Speed Sel 1 The input functions are 1 Enable If the input is closed the drive can run start permissive If the input is open the drive will not start If the drive is already running when this input is opened the drive will coast and indicate not enabled on the OIM if present This is not considered a fault condition and no fault will be generated If multiple enable inputs are configured the drive will not run if any of them are open 12 88 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 2 Clear Faults This function allows an external device to reset drive faults through the terminal block if Logic Source Sel 89 is set to Terminal BIK or All Ports An open to closed transition on this input will reset the current fault if any If this input is configured at the same time as Stop Clear Faults then only the Clear Faults input can actually cause faults to be reset 3 Function Loss If the function loss input is open a fault is generated The function loss input is active at all times regardless of the selected logic control source Important The function loss input is not intended for a fast output power kill The drive will not fault until the software detects the change of state of this input If this input function is not configured the fault will not occur 4 Stop CF Stop Clear Faults An open input will assert a stop command if the terminal block is the contro
80. 000 to 4 294 967 2925 Hr 0 0001 Hr Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Faults See also 244 246 248 250 Displays elapsed hours since initial drive power up This value will roll over to 0 after the drive has been powered on for more than the maximum value shown 259 Alarm Config 1 Range See figure12 42 Default See figure12 42 Access 2 Path Utility gt Alarms See also Selects alarm conditions that will initiate a drive alarm See table 12 3 for alarm descriptions RY N Y V A Saa BS EZS SSS Ws LIS YIN NY RY x x x x x x 1 1 1 x 1 1 x 1 1 1 1 Enabled 151413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 O Disabled f Nibble4 Nibble3 Nibble2 Nibble1 Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Figure 12 42 Alarm Config 1 259 12 72 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 271 Drive Logic Rslit Range See figure12 43 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Communication gt Comm Control See also Displays the output state of the logic function control block resulting from the combination of all port requests and masking functions Each bit or set of bits represent a command to the drive Bit 6 will always 0 1 Condition Active 0 Condition Inactive x Reserved Nibble 3 G B A wo ine Description No Command Man Mode Ref A Auto Preset 2 Auto Preset 3 Auto Preset 4 Auto Pres
81. 1 Restore defaults Chksum from the board does not 2 Reload user set if used match the checksum calculated Params 48 The drive was 1 Clear the fault or cycle Defaulted commanded to write power to the drive default values to 2 Program the drive EEPROM parameters as needed Phase U to 38 A phase to ground fault 1 Check the wiring Grnd has been detected between the drive and Phasa Vio T between the drive and motor Grid motor in this phase 2 Check motor for grounded phase Phase W to 40 2 Grnd 3 Replace drive Phase UV 4 Excessive currenthas 1 Check the motor and Short been detected between drive output terminal these two output wiring for a shorted Phase VW 42 terminals condition Short 2 Replace drive Phase UW 43 Short Port 1 6 DPI 81 DPI port stopped 1 If module was not Loss 86 communicating intentionally An attached peripheral with control capabilities via Logic Source Sel 89 or OIM control was removed The fault code indicates the offending port number 81 port 1 etc disconnected check wiring to the port Replace wiring port expander modules Main Control board or complete drive as required 2 Check OIM connection 13 14 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table 13 6 Fault Descriptions and Corrective Actions Continued Fault ZS Description Action Port 1 6 Net 71 The network module 1 Check communication Loss 76 connected to DPI port
82. 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table 7 1 Wiring Signal and Control I O to the Terminal Block Digital In1 Sel CGAAIGATAIQATIZATAT UD 28 V G AD M YV Factory Default Stop CF CF Clear Fault Digital In2 Sel Start Digital In3 Sel Auto Man Digital In4 Sel Speed Sel 1 Digital In5 Sel Speed Sel 2 Digital In6 Sel Speed Sel 3 Description 11 2 mA 24V DC 19 2V minimum on state 3 2V maximum off state Important Use only 24V DC not suitable for 115V AC circuitry Inputs can be wired as sink or source 24V Common Digital In Common KO llJ Ol oO AJOJN 24V DC Drive supplied power for Digital In1 6 inputs 150mA maximum load oO 10V Pot Reference 2 k ohm minimum load Digital Out 1 N O NOT Fault Digital Out 1 Common Digital Out 1 N C Max Resistive Max Inductive Load Load 250 VAC 30 VDC 250 VAC 30 DC 50 VAC 60 Watts 25 VAC 30 Watts Minimum DC Load 10 pA 10 mV DC Analog In 1 Volts Analog In 1 Volts Analog In 1 Current Analog In 1 Current 2 Voltage Reads value at14 amp 15 Non isolated 0 to 10V 10 bit 100k ohm input impedance Non isolated 4 20mA 10 bit 100 ohm input impedance Analog In 2 Volts Analog In 2 Volts Analog In 2 Current
83. 2 3488 Serial Converter for DPI Drives RECOMM 232 D2 3477 included with VS Utilities About the Drive 2 24 Mounting the Drive This chapter provides information that must be considered when planning a SP600 AC drive installation and provides drive mounting information Installation site requirements drive requirements and wiring requirements are presented ATTENTION Only qualified electrical personnel familiar with the construction and operation of this equipment and the hazards involved should install adjust operate or service this equipment Read and understand this manual and other applicable manuals in their entirety before proceeding Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life ATTENTION Use of power correction capacitors on the output of the drive can result in erratic operation of the motor nuisance tripping and or permanent damage to the drive Remove power correction capacitors before proceeding Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION The user is responsible for conforming with all applicable local national and international codes Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION Do not submerge NEMA 4X 12 drives in water Use a waterproof cable gland for the cable lead in section After wiring is complete mount the front cover and
84. 227 Status 1 Fault Range See figure12 37 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 209 224 230 Captures and displays the Drive Status 1 bit pattern at the time of the last fault See parameter 209 for the bit descriptions S Sl el E lt 0 15 14 13 12 1 g Nibble 4 Nibble 3 Nibble 2 As 0 0 1 Condition True 1 01 0 Condition False Nibble 1 x Reserved Bit Figure 12 37 Status 1 Fault 227 228 Status 2 Fault Range See figure12 38 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 210 224 230 Captures and displays the Drive Status 2 bit pattern at the time of last fault See parameter 210 for the bit descriptions x x 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 is Nibble 4 Nibble 3 Nibble 2 0 0 1 Condition True 1 0 0 Condition False Nibble 1 x Reserved Bit Figure 12 38 Status 2 Fault 228 12 68 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 229 Alarm 1 Fault Range See figure12 39 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 211 224 230 Captures and displays the Drive Alarm 1 at the time of the last fault See parameter 211 for the bit descriptions EST EI EES VSS ES EEE SSY AY AIS x x x x x x 1 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 0 1 Condition True 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Cond
85. 27 device version how to determine 13 26 DeviceNet module 2 23 Dig In Status 216 12 65 Dig Out Status 217 12 66 Dig Out1 Level 381 12 97 Dig Out1 OffTime 383 12 97 Dig Out1 OnTime 382 12 97 Dig Out2 Level 385 12 100 Dig Out2 OffTime 387 12 101 Dig Out2 OnTime 386 12 100 Digital In1 Sel 361 12 87 Digital In2 Sel 362 12 87 Digital In3 Sel 363 12 87 Digital In4 Sel 364 12 87 Digital In5 Sel 365 12 87 Digital In6 Sel 366 12 87 Digital Out1 Sel 380 12 95 Digital Out2 Sel 384 12 98 digital outputs 2 7 Direction Mode 190 12 53 display timeout period setting 9 15 DPI interface 2 12 DPI ports 2 21 drive connections NEMA 1 2 21 connections NEMA 4 2 22 control modes 2 8 derating guidelines A 8 features 2 7 to 2 17 installation site requirements 3 5 mounting 3 1 to 3 15 operation over wide speed ranges 10 5 parameter descriptions 12 1 to 12 101 ratings 2 3 to 2 6 start stop control 10 5 troubleshooting 13 1 to 13 28 wiring 4 1 to 4 12 Drive Alarm 1 211 12 63 Drive Alarm 2 212 12 63 Drive Checksum 203 12 58 Drive Logic Rslt 271 12 73 Drive OL Count 219 12 66 Drive OL Mode 150 12 39 Drive Ramp Rslt 273 12 74 Drive Ref Rslt 272 12 73 Drive Status 1 209 12 61 Drive Status 2 210 12 62 drive status parameters accessing using LCD OIM 13 25 Drive Temp 218 12 66 Dyn UserSet Actv 206 12 60 Dyn UserSet Cnfg 204 12 59 dynamic br
86. 3 3 user sets about 2 13 loading and saving using LCD OIM 9 8 V voltage class 2 17 Voltage Class 202 12 58 VS Utilities 2 24 connecting to NEMA 4 drives 2 23 2 24 W watts loss rating verifying 3 15 watts loss ratings 2 4 2 6 wire routing 5 1 to 5 2 wiring control and signal 4 5 motor lead lenghts A 10 motor lead lengths 4 5 power 4 1 to 4 3 three wire start stop control 10 6 two wire start stop control 10 6 wiring diagram default drive configuration 7 9 I O 7 7 Index 6 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Documentation Improvement Form Use this form to give us your comments concerning this publication or to report an error that you have found For convenience you may attach copies of the pages with your comments After you have completed this form please return it to Reliance Electric Standard Drives Technical Documentation 6040 Ponders Court Greenville SC 29617 Fax 864 284 5483 Publication Name SP600 AC Drive User Manual Publication Number D2 3485 5 Publication Date December 2004 Comments Your Name Date Company Name Phone __ Address E mail Thank you for your comments Technical Writing Internal Use Date DIF Number Follow Up Action Rockwell This document as well as more information about Reliance Electric products can be found at www reliance com drives www roc
87. 366 ATTENTION The user must provide an external hardwired emergency stop circuit outside of the drive circuitry This circuit must disable the system in case of improper operation Uncontrolled machine operation may result if this procedure is not followed Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Selects the active stop mode Stop Mode A is active unless Stop Mode B is selected by a digital input This function allows the user to switch between two possible stop modes using an external logic signal Refer to figure 12 18 Stop Mode B KE Dig In 2 Dig In Dig In OQ Digin D 24V Refer to parameters 361 366 Figure 12 18 Selecting Stop Mode B 0 Coast When Stop Mode A 155 is set to Coast the drive acknowledges the Stop command by shutting off the output transistors and releasing control of the motor The load motor will coast or free spin until the mechanical energy is dissipated 12 40 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Output Voltage Output Current Motor Speed T Time lt Coast Time is load dependent 2 Stop Command Figure 12 19 Coast to Stop Stop Mode A 0 1 Ramp When Stop Mode A 155 is set to Ramp the drive ramps the frequency to zero based on the deceleration time programmed into Decel Time 1 142 or Decel Time 2 143 The normal mode of machine operation can use Decel Time 1 If a faster deceleration than normal mode is required Decel Time 2 ca
88. 387 Dig Out2 OffTime Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs E 6 SP600 AC Drive User Manual A Accel Time 1 140 12 37 Accel Time 2 141 12 37 access levels parameter 11 5 Alarm 1 Fault 229 12 69 Alarm 2 Fault 230 12 69 Alarm Config 1 259 12 72 alarms about 13 4 descriptions 13 5 names cross referenced to numbers 13 7 Analog In 1 Hi 322 12 81 Analog In 1 Lo 323 12 82 Analog In 1 Loss 324 12 82 Analog In 2 Hi 325 12 83 Analog In 2 Lo 326 12 83 Analog In 2 Loss 327 12 84 Analog In1 Value 16 12 7 Analog In2 Value 17 12 7 analog input selection path diagram C 1 analog inputs 2 7 Analog Out1 Hi 343 12 86 Analog Out1 Lo 344 12 86 Analog Out1 Set 342 12 85 analog outputs 2 7 Anlg In Config 820 12 79 Anlg In Sqr Root 321 12 80 Anlg Out Absolute 341 12 85 auto reference sources 7 10 auto restart 2 9 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 12 51 Auto Rstrt Tries 174 12 50 auto manual control 7 11 selection 2 9 Autotune 61 12 15 autotune feature 2 10 avoidance frequency see skip band braking dynamic 6 9 to 6 11 branch circuit protection 6 7 Break Frequency 72 12 17 Break Voltage 71 12 17 Bus Reg Gain 160 12 44 Bus Reg Mode A 161 12 45 Bus Reg Mode B 162 12 45 C Cable Entry Plate removal 5 1 Carrier Frequency 151 12 39 CE conformity 2 18 circuit breakers 4 9 Commanded Freq 2 12 5 common mode capacitor ju
89. 5 kW 15 0 HP 11 0 kW 20 0 HP 15 0 kW 25 0 HP 18 5 kW 600 VAC 1P1 1 1 A 0 5 HP 0 37 kW 0P9 0 9 A 0 5 HP 0 37 kW 2P1 2 1 A 1 0 HP 0 75 kW 1P7 1 7 A 1 0 HP 0 75 kW HP 1 5 kW S 2 0 HP 1 5 kW HP 2 2 kW 3 0 HP 2 2 kW HP 4 0 kW 5 0 HP 4 0 kW 7 5 HP 5 5 kW 7 5 HP 5 5 kW 10 0 HP 7 5 kW 10 0 HP 7 5 kW 15 0 HP 11 0 kW 15 0 HP 11 0 kW 20 0 HP 15 0 kW 20 0 HP 15 0 kw 25 0 HP 19 KW 25 0 HP 18 5 kW 30 0 HP 22 KW 30 0 HP 22 kw 40 HP 30 KW 40 0 HP 30 kW 50 HP 37 KW 50 0 HP 37 kW 2020 Figure 2 1 Identifying the Drive by Model Number 2 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 2 2 Identifying the Drive by Frame Size Throughout this manual drives are identified either by horsepower or frame size Refer to tables 2 1 and 2 2 for the definition of each frame size Table 2 1 Identifying the NEMA 1 Drive by Frame Frame 240 V 480 V 600 V 5 1 0 HP 5 1 0 HP 5 1 0 HP 2 3HP 2 5HP 2 5HP 5 HP 7 5 10 HP 7 5 10 HP 7 5 15 HP 15 30 HP 15 30 HP 20 25 HP 40 50 HP 40 50 HP T Note these ratings with internal filters are shipped as a B size frame Table 2 2 Identifying the NEMA 4x 12 Drive by Frame NEMA Rating 5 3 0HP 5 5 0HP 5 5 0 HP 5 15 HP 7 5 30 HP 7 5 30 HP 20 25 HP 40 50 HP 40 50 HP 20 25 HP 40 50 HP 40 50 HP 2 3 Power Enclosure Ratings Each of the SP600 AC drives ha
90. 63 Digital In3 Sel Function Loss Figure 10 4 Two Wire and Three Wire Start Stop Control 10 3 4 Speed Reference Source The default configuration is for keypad reference source If you want to use an analog reference input for control you must configure the analog reference inputs The example below shows speed reference from an analog voltage input Analog inputs can also be configured for 4 to 20 mA Analog Reference Wiring Voltage N x E E O N x S av X X amp x we T 10 14 15 22 f P P 90 Speed Ref A Sel Analog In1 91 Speed Ref Hi 60 Hz 92 Speed Ref Lo 0 Hz 320 Analog In Config xx00 322 Analog In Hi 10 0 V P323 Analog In Lo 0 0 V Figure 10 5 Analog Speed Reference 10 6 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 11 1 Programming Basics To program the drive for a specific application you adjust the appropriate parameters The parameters are used to define characteristics of the drive This chapter provides an overview of parameter types and how they are organized Parameter descriptions are provided in chapter 12 About Parameters There are three types of parameters e Numbered List Parameters Numbered list parameters allow a selection from two or more options The LCD OIM displays a text message for each item Example Speed Ref A Sel 90 e Bit Parameters Bit parameters have individual bits asso
91. 66 Drive OL The calculated IGBT temperature requires a reduction in Level 1 PWM carrier frequency If Drive OL Mode 150 is disabled and the load is not reduced an overload fault will eventually occur Drive OL The calculated IGBT temperature requires a reduction in Level 2 Current Limit If Drive OL Mode 150 is disabled and the load is not reduced an overload fault will eventually occur Flux Amps Result of autotune procedure 61 Ref Rang IntDBRes The drive has temporarily disabled the dynamic braking OvrHeat regulator because the resistor temperature has exceeded a predetermined value IR Volts The drive autotuning default is Calculate and the value Range calculated for IR Drop Volts is not in the range of acceptable values This alarm should clear when all motor nameplate data is properly entered MaxFreq J The sum of Maximum Speed 82 and Overspeed Limit 83 Conflict exceeds Maximum Freq 55 Raise Maximum Freq 55 or lower Maximum Speed 82 and or Overspeed Limit 83 so that the sum is less than or equal to Maximum Freq 55 Motor Type Motor Type 90 has been set to Sync Prm Mag or Sync Cflct Reluc and one or more DC functions for example DC Boost DC Brake etc have been activated DC injection functions are incompatible with synchronous motors and may demagnetize them NP Hz Fan pump mode is selected in Torq Perf Mode 53 and the Conflict ratio of Motor NP Hertz 43 to Maximum
92. 7 Parameter Descriptions 12 17 80 Speed Mode Range 0 Open Loop Le 1 Slip Comp 2 Process PI Default 0 Open Loop Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits See also 124 138 Sets the method of speed regulation See figure 12 6 0 Open Loop provides no speed compensation due to load variations This is strict volts per hertz output as a function of the speed reference 1 Slip Comp provides for frequency output adjustment as a function of load The amount of compensation is defined by the value of Slip RPM FLA 2 Process PI allows for the output motor speed frequency to be adjusted based on the outer control loop regulator Slip C Slip Adder L jiu Open L Spd Ret Tie Ramp dT Spd Gnd Process tat P BI Het H eO Process PI Controller T PI Fbk PI Disabled Speed Control Figure 12 6 Speed Control Method 81 Minimum Speed Range 0 0 to Maximum Speed _ 0 1 Hz Default 0 0 Hz Access 0 Path Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits See also 83 92 95 Sets the low limit for the speed reference after scaling is applied See figure 12 7 ATTENTION The drive can operate at and maintain zero speed The user is responsible for assuring safe conditions for operating personnel by providing suitable guards audible or visual alarms or other devices to indica
93. 7 Replacement Parts Table 13 17 OIM Cables Description Part Number LCD OIM Cable for remote use RECBL LCD LCD OIM Extender Cable 0 3 meter RECBL F03 LCD OIM Extender Cable 1 meter RECBL F10 LCD OIM Extender Cable 3 meters RECBL F30 LCD OIM Extender Cable 9 0 meters RECBL F90 Table 13 18 NEMA 4 Covers Description Part Number B Frame Cover NEMA 4X 12 6SP4X CVR B D Frame Cover NEMA 4X 12 6SP4X CVR D E Frame Cover NEMA 4X 6SP4X CVR E E Frame Cover NEMA 12 6SP12 CVR E 13 8 Troubleshooting the Drive Using the LCD OIM The LCD OIM provides immediate visual notification of alarm or fault conditions as well as the following diagnostic information e Entries in the fault queue e Fault parameters e Drive status parameters e List of parameters that have been changed from their default value s Selected device version and status information s OIM version information Troubleshooting the Drive 13 23 13 8 1 Accessing the Fault Queue As described in section 13 4 1 the drive automatically retains a history of the last four faults that have occurred in the fault queue To access the fault queue press the F4 key at the process display screen or see figure 13 4 to access the fault queue from the Main Menu Stopped TR Aol P0 SP600 Main Menu a Dia OMR Fita H Fibooax K View Fault Queue N Fault Text Str
94. CD OIM if configured see chapter 9 for information on configuring F Keys Parameter Descriptions 12 37 142 Decel Time 1 143 Decel Time 2 Range 0 1 to 3600 0 Sec 0 1 Sec Default 10 0 Sec Access 142 0 Path Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates 143 2 See also 142 143 146 361 366 Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases Max Speed Decel Time Decel Rate Two decel times exist to enable deceleration rate changes on the fly using a network command digital input or F Key on the LCD OIM if configured see chapter 9 for information on configuring F Keys 146 S Curve Range Oto 100 1 Default 0 Access 0 Path Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates See also 140 143 Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to the ramp as an S curve Time is entered as a percentage of accel or decel time and ramp times are extended 1 2 at the beginning and 1 2 at the end of the ramp For example Accel 10 sec S Curve 25 2 5 seconds will be added to the accel time 1 25 seconds of rounding at each end of the ramp 147 Current Lmt Sel CoO Range 0 Curr Lim Val 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 Default 0 Cur Lim Val Access 2 Path Dynamic Control gt Load Limits See also 148 149 Selects the source for the adjustment of current limit i e parameter analog input etc Allows for external current limit via analog inputs If an analog input is selected 1 2 Analog Inx
95. Chart Ce Frame Jumper Removes N A JP6 JP5 Common Mode Capacitors to Ground JP3B JP3A Common Mode Capacitors to Ground JP3 JP4 Common Mode Capacitors to Ground Three Phase R AC Input S T 1 2 3 4 See Chart y y Jumper JP3 JP2 removes MOV to Ground Frames A D Jumper JP1 JP2 removes MOV to Ground Frame E Figure 3 2 Phase to Ground MOV Removal 3 1 1 2 Input Power Conditioning Certain events on the power system supplying a drive can cause component damage or shortened product life These conditions are divided into two basic categories All Drives The power system has power factor correction capacitors switched in and out of the system either by the user or by the power company The power source has intermittent voltage spikes in excess of 6000 volts These spikes could be caused by other equipment on the line or by events such as lightning strikes The power source has frequent interruptions 3 4 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 3 1 2 2 5 HP or Less Drives In addition to the conditions listed under All Drives The nearest supply transformer is larger than 100 kVA or the available short circuit fault current is greater than 100 000 A The impedance in front of the drive is less than 0 5 If any or all of these conditions exist it is recommended that the user install a minimum amount of impedance between the drive and the source Th
96. Data Motor NP FLA Motor Control gt Motor Data Motor NP Hertz Motor Control gt Motor Data Motor NP RPM Motor Control gt Motor Data Motor NP Power Motor Control gt Motor Data Mtr NP Pwr Units Motor Control gt Motor Data Motor OL Hertz Motor Control gt Motor Data Motor OL Factor Motor Control gt Motor Data Torque Perf Mode Motor Control gt Torq Attributes Maximum Voltage Motor Control gt Torq Attributes Maximum Freq Motor Control gt Torq Attributes Compensation Motor Control gt Torg Attributes Flux Up Mode Motor Control gt Torg Attributes Flux Up Time Motor Control gt Torq Attributes Autotune Motor Control gt Torg Attributes IR Voltage Drop Motor Control gt Torg Attributes Flux Current Ref Motor Control gt Torg Attributes Start Acc Boost Motor Control gt Volts per Hertz Run Boost Motor Control gt Volts per Hertz Break Voltage Motor Control gt Volts per Hertz Break Frequency Motor Control gt Volts per Hertz Speed Mode Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Minimum Speed Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Record of User Settings E 1 Parameter Name Maximum Speed Path File gt Group Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Setting Overspeed Limit Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Skip Frequency 1 Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Skip Frequency 2 Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Lim
97. ET D2 3497 EtherNet IP Communication Module RECOMM ENET D2 3510 RS485 DF1 Communication Module RECOMM 485 D2 3514 2 8 Remote Operator Interface The SP600 drive can be controlled and monitored using a remote LCD OIM Operator Interface Module Note that you must set parameters 89 and 90 to DPI Port 2 to enable control from the remote keypad Table 2 8 Remote OIM Model Numbers and Instruction Manual Numbers Instruction Description Model Number Manual Remote NEMA 4X LCD OIM RE4LCD PNL D2 3490 Remote Small NEMA 4X LCD OIM RE4ALCD D2 3525 2 8 1 Connecting the Remote OIM or VS Utilities to the Drive NEMA 1 Drives The remote OIM or VS Utilities via the Serial Converter see section 2 10 connects to DPI port 2 at the bottom of the drive frame labeled in figure 2 4 About the Drive 2 23 NEMA 4 Drives The connector for the remote OIM or VS Utilities is located inside the drive You must route the cable through the bottom conduit holes in the drive and connect it to DPI port 2 as shown in figure 2 6 Figure 2 6 DPI Port 2 on NEMA 4 Drives 2 9 PC Based Utility The SP600 drive can be configured using a PC based software utility such as VS Utilities This program enables you to upload and download parameter configurations Table 2 9 PC Based Utility Model Number and Instruction Manual Number Instruction Description Model Number Manual VS Utilities RECOMM VSU232 D
98. Figure 9 8 Load From User Bet sssss sees esse seer eee eenn teeeeeeeaeeeeeeetetees 9 10 Figure 9 9 Process User Display Screen eee eee 9 11 Figure 9 10 OIM Reference Displayed eee 9 11 Figure 9 11 Customizing the Process Display Screen ee ee ee 9 12 Figure 9 12 Accessing the Function Key Configuration Screens 9 13 Figure 9 13 Customizing the Function Key Label Text asses e eee 9 15 Figure 9 14 Selecting Reverse Video for the Process Display Screen 9 16 Figure 9 15 Selecting the Control and Reference Source eee eee 9 17 Figure 10 1 Accessing the Start Up Routines sese ee eee ee eee 10 2 Figure 10 2 Start Up Menu sese eree ee ee eee eee 10 2 Figure 10 3 Start Stop Control using the Local OIM eee eee 10 5 Figure 10 4 Two Wire and Three Wire Start Stop Control ee ee 10 6 Figure 10 5 Analog Speed Reference ceccsesceeseeeseeeeeeeeseteneeeeeeenaes 10 6 Figure 11 1 Example of Parameter Organizalion eee eee eee 11 2 Figure 11 2 Accessing the Parameters Using the LCD OIM 11 3 Figure 11 3 Parameter Access Levels eee 11 5 Figure 11 4 Selecting the Parameter Access Level eee 11 5 Figure 11 5 Setting the Access Level Password sese eee eee 11 6 Figure 11 6 Setting the Write Protect Password eee eee eee 11 7 Figure 12 1 Motor OL Hertz 7 12 11 Figure 12 2 Custom V HZ Curve sese eee eee 12 12 Figure 12 3 Fan
99. Freq 55 is greater than 26 Power Drive has sensed a power line loss Loss Prechrg Drive is in the initial DC bus precharge state Actv Speed Ref Speed Ref A Sel 90 or PI Reference Sel 126 is set to Cflct Reserved Under The bus voltage has dropped below a predetermined value Voltage 13 6 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table 13 3 Alarm Descriptions Continued Q Alam Description UserSet Datalink In is linked to Dyn UserSetSel 205 without the Conflict identical condition being present in the other two User sets This alarm will occur even if the other two User Sets are unused A digital input is set to UserSetBitx without the identical condition being present in the other two User sets This alarm will occur even if the other two User Sets are unused VHz Neg Custom V Hz mode has been selected in Torq Perf Mode Slope 53 and the V Hz slope is negative Table 13 4 Alarm Names Cross Referenced by Alarm Numbers Alarm No Alarm Precharge Active Bipolar Conflict UnderVoltage Motor Type Conflict Power Loss NP Hz Conflict Analog In Loss MaxFreq Conflict IntDBRes OvrHeat VHz Neg Slope Drive OL Level 1 IR Volts Range Drive OL Level 2 FluxAmps Ref Rang Dig In ConflictA Speed Ref Cflct Dig In ConflictB DigIn Bad Value Dig In ConflictC UserSet Conflict Alarm numbers not listed a
100. Line Nominal Motor Drive Full Drive Operating Voltage Voltage Power Range Range Vin Vin 200 240 200 200 200 264 180 264 208 208 208 264 240 230 230 264 380 400 380 380 380 528 342 528 400 400 400 528 480 460 460 528 500 600 600 5751 575 660 432 660 Drive Full Power Range Nominal Motor Voltage to Drive Rated Voltage 10 Rated current is available across the entire Drive Full Power Voltage Range tDrive Operating Range Lowest Nominal Motor Voltage 10 to Drive Rated Voltage 10 Drive Output is linearly derated when Actual Line Voltage is less than the Nominal Motor Voltage Technical Specifications A 11 No Dri lt gt erated Power Range i o Drive H Output ie Full Power Range r tah Drive Operating Range T E 2 E gt oO E 2 a S S 2 S a I Nominal Motor Voltage 10 Drive Rated Voltage x Nominal Motor Voltage gt Drive Rated Voltage 10 gt i Actual Line Voltage Drive Input Example No Drive Output HP Motor Drive Output 342V pi 480V gt 460V gt 528V K Actual Line Voltage Drive Input Calculate the maximum power of a 5 HP 460V motor connected to a 480V rated drive supplied with 342V Actual Line Voltage input s Actual Line Voltage Nominal Motor Voltage 342 460 x 100 74 3 e 74 3 x 5 HP 3 7 HP 74 3 x 60 Hz 44 6 Hz At 342V Actual Line Voltage the
101. OIM 9 1 9 2 9 2 1 Installing and Removing the Local LCD OIM NEMA 1 Drives Only To install the local LCD OIM slide the OIM into the slot on the front of the drive until it clicks into place To remove the local LCD OIM press the tab at the top of the drive to release the OIM while pushing the OIM from the bottom to slide it out of the drive To install To remove Slide OIM into Press tab the slot on the _ to release the front of the drive we OIM until it clicks into ait place Push the OIM up and slide it out of the drive Figure 9 2 Installing and Removing the Local LCD OIM NEMA 1 Only Removing the Local LCD OIM While the Drive is Powered If the local LCD OIM is the selected control source removing the OIM while the drive is powered will cause a drive fault If the local LCD OIM is not the selected control source but is the reference source removing the OIM while the drive is powered will result in a zero reference value When the OIM is replaced the drive will ramp to the reference level supplied by the OIM ATTENTION Removing and replacing the LCD OIM while the drive is running may cause an abrupt speed change if the LCD OIM is the selected reference source but is not the selected control source The drive will ramp to the reference level provided by the OIM atthe rate specified in Accel Time 1 140 Accel Time 2 141 Decel Time 1 142 and Decel Time 2 143 Be aware that an abr
102. OIM and standard I O 3 8 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Lae 86 4 3 40 gt i lt 127 5 5 02 22 2 0 87 Dia 34 5 1 36 lt gt TEAC Dia 43 4 1 71 5 Places 23 9 0 94 Le 32 8 1 29 L L Ee 155 2 IS IS 136 7 635 E35 B S SA 102 4 KE 101 6 4 03 iS S 4 00 tox UR L GU A SO Sy Y 42 7 1 68 k gt 55 6 2 19 55 4 gi 8 gt 55 G lt 79 3 3 12 gt lt 85 7 3 37 gt lt 85 1 3 35 lt 113 5 4 47 lt 123 8 4 87 Frame A Frame B 112 3 4 42 gt 222 087 D Lae 149 7 5 89 deria R x L ia L L L 477 1 88 K 4 Places lt 69 3 2 73 gt aan pi 22 2 0 87 Dia lt 58 230 2 Places T D A T Foro i 8 6 44 ei 6 48 129 3 ia 1347 6 09 R T 6 30 101 3 103 2 3 99 4 06 l EON X WSs y y U CS ber Y 36 1 1 42 lt gt 37 5 1 48 Lae 56 1 paa 64 0 2 52 gt lt 75 2 2 96 gt lt 93
103. Output Power Wiring ATTENTION Donot route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury To connect the AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor Step 1 Wire the three phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to drive type See figure 5 1 to for wire routing locations Maximum power wiring sizes are shown in table 4 2 Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drive motor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads Step 2 Connect the three phase AC output power motor leads to terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 on the power terminal block See figure 6 5 Step 3 Tighten the three phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque a
104. PUmp CUS sees sees eee eee eee 12 13 Figure 12 4 Speed Limits eee eee cece neee neee 12 13 Figure 12 5 Compensation 56 sese eee ee eee eee 12 14 Figure 12 6 Speed Control Method sss sese eee eee 12 18 Figure 12 7 Speed Limits eee eee eee nere 12 19 Figure 12 8 Skip Freq Band 871 12 20 Figure 12 9 Logic Source Sel 991 12 22 Figure 12 10 Reference Selecion eee eee ee 12 24 Figure 12 11 Trim Input Select 12 27 Figure 12 12 Trim Out Select 1181 12 28 Figure 12 13 PI Configuration 124 0 0 sees eee 12 30 Figure 12 14 PI Control 1251 12 32 VI SP600 AC Drive User Manual Figure 12 15 Pl Regulator esse eee seer eeeee ereenn ennenen 12 32 Figure 12 16 PI Preload Value eee crore cerren reo 12 35 Figure 12 17 Pl Status 134 seene 12 36 Figure 12 18 Selecting Stop Mode B seene 12 40 Figure 12 19 Coast to Stop Stop Mode A 01 12 41 Figure 12 20 Ramp Stop Stop Mode A 1 sss 12 41 Figure 12 21 Ramp to Hold Stop Mode A 2 ou sese 12 42 Figure 12 22 DC Brake Stop Mode A 21 sss 12 42 Figure 12 23 Selecting Bus Reg Mode B sene 12 46 Figure 12 24 Protective Circuit for External Resistor Packages 12 47 Figure 12 25 Save OIM Ref 1921 12 54 Figure 12 26 Save MOP Ref 194 12 55 Figure 12 27 Configuring Digital Inputs for MOP Inc and MOP Dec 12 55 Figure 12 28
105. Power e Motor FLA e Motor Volts e Motor Hertz e Motor RPM Motor Tests e Direction e Autotune Starting Up the Drive Using the LCD OIM 10 3 ATTENTION Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during the Autotune procedure Autotune 61 Rotate Tune Disconnect the motor before proceeding Failure to observe this precaution can result in damage to or destruction of the equipment Speed Limits e Minimum Maximum e Direction Limit s Stop Mode Reference Setup s OIM Terminal Block Network Other Configure I O e Digital Inputs Outputs e Two Three Wire Start e Analog Outputs As you adjust the parameters in the Start Up routines record them in Appendix E When you have completed adjusting all of the parameters in the Start Up routines that your application requires select the last item in the menu Done Exiting Before Completing the Start Up Routines To exit the Start Up routines press the F4 key Exit When you select the Start Up icon from the main menu again you will be prompted to either continue or restart the Start Up routines If you select continue you will be returned to the point at which you exited SP600 AC Drive User Manual 10 3 Other Start Up Considerations The following sections describe other factors you must consider before starting up the drive 10 3 1 Sensorless Vector Performance If sensorless vector operation is required Torque Performance
106. Refer to the parameter descriptions in chapter 12 for more information Motor Operated Potentiometer MOP Function The Motor Operated Pot MOP function is one of the sources for the frequency reference selected in parameter 90 The MOP function uses digital inputs to increment or decrement the speed reference at a programmed rate The MOP has these components MOP Rate parameter 195 Save MOP Ref parameter 194 S MOP Frequency parameter 11 MOP increment input parameters 361 to 366 MOP decrement input parameters 361 to 366 2 4 10 Auto Restart Reset Run The Auto Restart feature enabled in parameter 174 Auto Rstrt Tries provides the ability for the drive to automatically perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application intervention This allows for automatic restart in applications where the drive is used in remote or unattended operation Important Only certain faults are allowed to be auto reset Faults that indicate possible drive malfunction are not resettable Caution should be used when enabling this feature since the drive will attempt to issue its own start command based on user selected programming Table 13 6 in chapter 13 lists the drive faults and whether they are auto resettable About the Drive 2 9 Refer to the descriptions of parameters 174 and 175 in chapter 12 for more information about using the Auto Restart feature 2 4 11 Autotune The Autotu
107. Replacing the Cover on NEMA 1 Drives Removing the Cover Follow these steps to remove the drive cover on NEMA 1 drives Step 1 Loosen the cover screw refer to figure 6 1 Step 2 Lift the cover straight off the drive to avoid damaging the connector pins Installing Power Wiring 6 1 m e Front View Bottom View Figure 6 1 Removing the Drive Cover NEMA 1 Drives Replacing the Cover Follow these steps to replace the drive cover on NEMA 1 drives Step 1 Place the cover straight on the drive to avoid damaging the connector pins Step 2 Tighten the cover screw 6 1 2 Removing and Replacing the Cover on NEMA 4x 12 Drives Removing the Cover Follow these steps to remove the drive cover on NEMA 4x 12 drives Step 1 Remove any user supplied locks from the drive Step 2 Loosen the four cover screws refer to figure 6 2 Frame E has a total of 10 screws that need to be loosened Step 3 Lift the cover straight off the drive to avoid damaging the connector pins 6 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Figure 6 2 Removing the Drive Cover NEMA 4x 12 Drives Frames B4 and D4 shown Replacing the Cover ATTENTION Mount the front cover and bottom cover carefully to avoid damaging the gasket The front cover mounting screws are made of stainless stee
108. SeH s ELECTRICS SP600 AC Drive User Manual Version 2 0 0 5 to 25 HP 230 VAC 0 5 to 50 HP 460 VAC 0 5 to 50 HP 600 VAC ay NEMA 4X 12 NEMA 1 Instruction Manual D2 3485 5 Rockwell The information in this manual is subject to change without notice Throughout this manual the following notes are used to alert you to safety considerations ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product The thick black bar shown on the outside margin of this page will be used throughout this instruction manual to signify new or revised text or figures ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with the construction and operation of this equipment and the hazards involved should install adjust operate or service this equipment Read and understand this document in its entirety before proceeding Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life ATTENTION DC bus capacitors retain hazardous voltages after input power has been removed After disconnecting input power wait five minutes for the DC bus capacitors to discharge and then check the voltage with a voltmeter to ensure the DC bus capacitors are discharged before touching any internal components Failure to
109. Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs Digital In3 Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs Digital In4 Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs Digital In5 Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs Digital In6 Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs Digital Out Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs Digital Out2 Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs Direction Mode Utility gt Direction Config Drive Alarm 1 Utility gt Diagnostics Utility gt Alarms Drive Alarm 2 Utility gt Diagnostics Utility gt Alarms Drive Checksum Utility gt Drive Memory Drive Logic Rslt Communication gt Comm Control Drive OL Count Utility gt Diagnostics Drive OL Mode Dynamic Control gt Load Limits Drive Ramp Rslt Communication gt Comm Control Drive Ref Rslt Communication gt Comm Control Drive Status 1 Utility gt Diagnostics Drive Status 2 Utility gt Diagnostics Drive Temp Utility gt Diagnostics Dyn UserSet Cnfg Utility gt Drive Memory Dyn UserSet Actv Utility gt Drive Memory DynUsrSetSel Utility gt Drive Memory Elapsed MWh Monitor gt Metering Elapsed Run Time Monitor gt Metering Parameters Cross Referenced by Name Parameter Name Fault Amps Path File gt Group Utility gt Diagnostics Fault Bus Volts Utility gt Diagnostics Fault Cl
110. Sets the continuous current operating level for the motor The parameter can be used to raise the level of current that will cause the motor thermal overload to trip The effective overload factor is a combination of parameters 47 and 48 Motor FLA x OL Factor Operating Level Continuous Parameter Descriptions 12 11 53 Torque Perf Mode Range 0 Sensrls Vect 1 SV Economize 2 Custom V Hz 3 Fan Pmp V Hz Default 0 Sensrls Vect Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Torg Attributes See also 62 63 69 70 Specifies the method of motor torque production 0 Sensrls Vect maintains consistent magnetizing current up to base speed and voltage increases as a function of frequency and load 1 SV Economize enables an energy saving function that allows the drive to automatically adjust output voltage as the load changes By adjusting the output voltage the flux producing current is reduced but only if the total drive output current does not exceed 75 of motor rated current In this mode the flux current is not allowed to be less than 50 of the selected flux current parameter value This is done so that minimum current is supplied to the motor thereby optimizing its efficiency 2 Custom V Hz allows for tailoring the volts hertz curve by adjusting Maximum Voltage 54 Maximum Freq 55 Run Boost 70 Break Voltage 71 and Break Frequency 72 Refer to figure 12 2 Maximum Voltage Base Voltage Nameplat
111. Type 4X 12 B4 171 7 6 76 239 8 9 44 203 3 8 00 122 7 4 83 220 2 8 67 5 8 0 3 61 7 95 D4 219 9 8 66 350 0 13 78 210 7 8 29 169 0 6 65 335 6 13 21 5 8 0 9 13 20 12 E4 280 3 11 04 555 8 21 88 219 8 8 65 200 0 7 87 491 0 19 33 6 9 0 18 60 41 0 280 3 11 04 555 8 21 88 219 8 8 65 200 0 7 87 491 0 19 33 6 9 0 18 60 41 0 Figure 3 4 Panel Mount Drive Dimensions 1 See table 3 2 2 Weights include OIM and standard 1 0 Mounting the Drive 3 7 U lt D Dimensions in mm in Weight kg lb Flange Mount A 156 0 6 14 225 8 8 89 178 6 7 03 123 0 4 84 55 6 2 19 5 22 11 5 B 205 2 8 08 234 6 9 24 178 6 7 03 123 0 4 84 55 6 2 19 7 03 15 5 C 219 0 8 62 300 0 11 81 178 6 7 03 123 0 4 84 55 6 2 19 12 52 27 6 D 248 4 9 78 350 0 13 78 178 6 7 03 117 2 4 61 55 6 2 19 18 55 40 9 E 280 3 11 04 555 8 21 88 207 1 8 15 130 0 5 12 89 9 3 54 18 60 41 0 Figure 3 5 Flange Mount Drive Dimensions 1 See table 3 2 2 Weights include
112. Values Figure 12 14 PI Control 125 The functions below can be controlled via digital input selection functions 361 366 Bit 0 PI Enable e Enables disables the operation of the PI loop Bit 1 PI Hold s Enabled The integrator for the outer control loop is held at the current level that is it will not increase e Disabled The integrator for the outer PI control loop is allowed to increase Bit 2 PI Reset s Enabled The integrator for the outer PI control loop is reset to zero e Disabled The integrator for the outer PI control loop integrates normally 132 PI PosLmt 131 PI NegLmt 128 PI FB nal PI Kp 126 PI Ref gt PI Output 129 Figure 12 15 PI Regulator 12 32 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 126 PI Reference Sel Co Selects the source of the outer control loop process PI reference signal 127 PI Setpoint Provides an internal register value for the process setpoint when PI Reference Sel 126 is set to PI Setpoint Parameter Descriptions 12 33 128 PI Feedback Sel Range 0 PI Setpoint CO 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 8 Reserved 9 MOP Level 10 Master Ref 11 Preset Spd 1 12 Preset Spd 2 13 Preset Spd 3 14 Preset Spd 4 15 Preset Spd 5 16 Preset Spd 6 17 Preset Spd 7 18 Local OIM 19 DPI Port 2 20 DPI Port 3 21 Reserved 22 Network 23 Rese
113. Viewing and Adjusting Parameters Refer to chapter 11 for information on how to access the parameters in the drive Each parameter screen contains the following information e Parameter number e Parameter name e Current parameter value and units e Parameter range s F1 key defined as a toggle to enable you to view the parameter s current value and the factory default value See figure 9 5 and table 9 2 for instructions on how to adjust the parameter values Parameter Parameter Name Value Units Lower limit lt gt Upper limit Step 1 At the parameter entry screen press to highlight the parameter value The screen shown here was accessed using the Parameters gt P Numbers path Step 2 Adjust the parameter value see table B 2 and then press to save the value If you do not want to save the value press fSc to return to the initial parameter screen You can then repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value or press to back out of this menu The F1 key is defined as a toggle to enable you to view the parameter s current value and the factory default value Parameter nnn Parameter Name Value Units Lower limit lt gt Upper limit Dit Save change OR e Don t save PROG change Parameter Parameter Name Value Units Lower limit lt gt Upper limit Figure 9 5 Adjusting Parameters Using the LCD OIM 9 7 Table 9 2 How to
114. aking 6 9 to 6 11 DynUsrSetSel 205 12 59 E Elapsed MWh 9 12 6 Elapsed Run Time 10 12 6 environmental conditions meeting 3 5 EtherNet IP module 2 23 external input disconnect 6 7 F Fault Amps 225 12 67 Fault Bus Volts 226 12 67 Fault Clear 240 12 71 Fault Clear Mode 241 12 71 Fault Config 1 238 12 71 Fault Frequency 224 12 67 fault queue accessing using LCD OIM 13 24 time stamp 13 9 faults about 13 7 clearing 13 10 descriptions and corrective actions 13 11 fault parameters accessing using LCD OIM 13 24 fault queue 13 9 names cross referenced by numbers 13 17 types 13 8 Index 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual features drive 2 7 to 2 17 F Keys customizing 9 12 flange mount drive cutout dimensions 3 12 to 3 14 to 3 14 Flux Current 5 12 5 Flux Current Ref 63 12 16 Flux Up Mode 57 12 14 Flux Up Time 58 12 15 Flying Start En 169 12 49 flying start feature 2 17 Flying StartGain 170 12 49 frame size identifying drive by 2 3 function keys see F Keys function loss 7 7 7 9 12 89 fuses 4 9 G grounding 5 3 I O terminal block specifications 4 5 UO wiring diagram 7 7 input amps ratings 2 4 2 6 input contactors using 4 4 input KVA ratings 2 4 2 6 input power conditioning 3 4 input wiring installing branch circuit protection 6 7 input disconnect 6 7 isolation transformer 6 6 line reactor 6 6 procedure 6 7
115. alog Input Unipolar Speed Reference 4 20 mA Input Configure Input for Current Param 320 Bit 2 1 Current Adjust Scaling Param 091 092 325 326 Check Results Param 017 Installing Control Wiring 7 5 Input Output Analog Output Unipolar 0 to 10V Output Can Drive a 2k Ohm load 25 mA short circuit limit Table 7 2 I O Wiring Examples Continued Connection Example Required Parameter Settings Select Source Value Param 342 Adjust Scaling Param 343 344 2 Wire Control Non Reversing or Reversing with a Digital Input set to 6 Disable Digital Input 1 Param 361 0 Not Used or 6 Set Digital Input 2 Param 362 7 Run 2 Wire Control Reversing External Supply Run Rev Run Fwd 24V Common 000000 mL Set Digital Input 1 Param 361 9 Run Reverse Set Digital Input 2 Param 362 8 Run Forward 3 Wire Control Internal Supply Use factory default parameter settings 3 Wire Control 000000 Use factory default parameter settings Digital Output Form C Relays Energized in Normal State Select Source Param 380 384 7 6 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 7 4 Wiring Diagram Control and Motor ATTENTION Opening the Function Loss input terminals 3 9 will stop the
116. an be activated from the OIM but not the I O terminals 12 74 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 288 Stop Owner Range See figure 12 45 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Communication gt Masks amp Owners See also 276 285 Indicates inputs that are presently issuing a valid stop command X X x x x XxX x X X 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 817 0 1 Enabled 0 0 Disabled 5 i Nibble4 Nibble3 Nibble2 Nibble1 X Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Source Location Terminal Blk 24V Logic I O DPI Port 1 Local OIM DPI Port 2 DIN Port DPI Port 3 Split DIN Port DPI Port 5 Network Typically connected to remote OIMs Figure 12 45 Stop Owner 298 Manual Owner Range See figure 12 46 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Communication gt Masks amp Owners See also Indicates the port that is supplying the manual mode speed reference and control X X x x x x 1 Control is Enabled 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0 Control is Disabled f Nibble 4 Nibble 3 il il x Reserved X X Bit Factory Default Bit Values Figure 12 46 Manual Owner Parameter Descriptions 12 75 300 Data ln A1 Link A Word 1 301 Data In A2 Link A Word 2 Range 0 to 387 1 LO Default 0 Disabled Access 2 Path Communication gt Datalinks See als
117. ath Utility gt Diagnostics Displays the present operating status of the drive X X 1 Condition True Nibble 4 0 Condition False x Reserved Bit Ready Description No start inhibits are active Active Drive is generating output voltage to the motor Running Drive is generating output voltage to the motor run has been selected Jogging Drive is in jog mode Stopping Drive is stopping DC Braking DC braking is active Auto Tuning Tuning function is active AutoRst Ctdn Auto Restart Countdown Refer to parameter 174 AutoRst Ac Auto Restart Active Refer to parameter 174 Curr Limit Drive is in current limit Bus Freq Reg Drive is regulating bus frequency Motor Overld Motor overload is active DPI 500 K DPI communications is operating at 500 kbaud 1 125 kbaud 0 Figure 12 31 Drive Status 2 210 12 62 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 211 Drive Alarm 1 Range See figure12 32 Default Read Only Access 1 Path Utility gt Diagnostics Utility gt Alarms See also 212 259 Indicates Type 1 alarm conditions that currently exist in the drive Note that for alarm conditions not configured in Alarm Config 1 259 the status indicated will be a zero See section 13 3 for alarm descriptions X X 1 Condition True ri 14 13 12 0 Condition False
118. ation Speed Command gt Process PI PI Control Speed Command gt Process PI PI Reference Sel Speed Command gt Process PI PI Setpoint Speed Command gt Process PI PI Feedback Sel Speed Command gt Process PI PI Integral Time Speed Command gt Process PI PI Prop Gain Speed Command gt Process PI PI Lower Limit Speed Command gt Process PI PI Upper Limit Speed Command gt Process PI PI Preload Speed Command gt Process PI Accel Time 1 Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates Accel Time 2 Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates Decel Time 1 Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates Decel Time 2 Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates S Curve Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates Current Lmt Sel Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates Current Lmt Val Dynamic Control gt Load Limits Current Lmt Gain Dynamic Control gt Load Limits Drive OL Mode Dynamic Control gt Load Limits CarrierFrequency Dynamic Control gt Load Limits Stop Mode A Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes Stop Mode B Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes DC Brake Lvl Sel Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes DC Brake Level Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes DC Brake Time Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes Bus Reg Gain Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes Bus Reg Mode A Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes Bus Reg Mode B Dynamic Control g
119. atus 1 Range See figure12 30 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 210 Displays the present operating status of the drive 1 Condition True 15 14 13 12 0 Condition False if Nibble 4 Nibble 3 i x Reserved Bit Bits 14 a wo N Description Description Ref A Auto Preset 1 Auto Preset 2 Auto Preset 3 Auto Preset 4 Auto Preset 5 Auto Preset 6 Auto Preset 7 Auto TB Manual Port 1 Manual Port 2 Manual Port 3 Manual Port 4 Manual Port 5 Manual Port 6 Manual Port 0 TB Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 No Local Control KK K A K A A 9 GGG 9 h O OO C h k 4300090 L 1 L h k O G OO KG AG A G A G E rh E eh C9 dh C h Eh E eh Om a CE ak k OO Function Description At Speed Output frequency equal setpoint frequency Faulted Drive fault active Alarm Drive alarm active Decelerating Drive decelerating Accelerating Drive accelerating Actual Dir Operating motor direction Commanded Dir Direction selected by the user Active Drive is outputting voltage Ready Drive is ready no faults or inhibits waiting for valid start Figure 12 30 Drive Status 1 209 Parameter Descriptions 12 61 210 Drive Status 2 Range See figure12 31 Default Read Only Access 2 See also 209 P
120. ay timeout period gt gt stopped Autofil Select up to three process Scale the output E to values to suit the monitor and application customize the text displayed Customize up to eight F Key labels Figure 9 9 Process User Display Screen Displaying and Changing the OIM Reference You can display the reference value that the OIM is sending to the drive by pressing the up or down arrow key once when the process display screen is active See figure 9 10 The OIM reference can be used for the speed reference PI reference or trim reference To change the displayed reference press and hold down either the up or down arrow key until the desired value is displayed Release the key to return to the process display screen gt gt Stopped Auto PO SP600 i OIM Ref 0 00Hz P 0 Man Fitq Figure 9 10 OIM Reference Displayed Note that changing the value of the OIM reference does not affect the value of any other port reference The value of the OIM reference is saved through a power cycle if parameter 192 Save OIM Ref is set to Save at Power Down Using the LCD OIM 9 11 9 8 2 Customizing the Process Display Screen To customize the process display screen select Monitor from the Display menu See figure 9 11 gt gt Stopped D Auto 2 PO SP600 Use a to select display line 1 2 or 3 Main Menu Display Language
121. ays the Main Control board software version 40 Motor Type Co Range 0 Induction 1 Synchr Reluc 2 Synchr PM Default 0 Induction Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Motor Data See also 1May conflict with DC Brake feature See Parameters 157 159 Selection of 1 or 2 requires that paremeter 53 be set to Custom V Hz 2 Set to match the type of motor connected 12 8 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 41 Motor NP Volts Range 0 0 to Drive Rated Volts 0 1 VAC Default Based on Drive Type Access 1 Path Motor Control gt Motor Data See also Set to the motor nameplate rated volts The motor nameplate base voltage defines the output voltage when operating at rated current rated speed and rated temperature 42 Motor NP FLA Range 0 0 to Rated Amps x 2 0 1 Amps Default Based on Drive Type Access 1 Path Motor Control gt Motor Data See also 47 48 Set to the motor nameplate rated full load amps The motor nameplate FLA defines the output amps when operating at rated voltage rated speed and rated temperature It is used in the motor thermal overload and in the calculation of slip This parameter set in the start up procedure is adjustable from 0 200 of drive rating and should be set for the actual motor FLA rating About the Motor Thermal Overload Function The operation of the overload is actually based on three parameters Motor NP FLA 42 Motor OL Factor 48 and Motor OL Hertz 47 T
122. be adjusted by qualified personnel only See figure 13 13 ATTENTION The parameters in the Device Items menu must be set by a qualified person who understands the significance of setting them accurately Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury gt gt Stopped PO SP600 Main Menu Diagnostics Dev Item ES Fault Info Param name AS fe Status Infor Param value Diagnostics Dfit Monitor A AIS Highlight item F1 Display default alg Highlight Diagnostics icon aly Scroll through items Figure 13 13 Accessing the Device Item Information Troubleshooting the Drive 13 27 13 8 6 Contacting Tech Support for Assistance The Tech Support option in the Diagnostics menu provides information regarding technical support 13 28 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Technical Specifications Table A 1 Protection AC Input Overvoltage Trip 247 VAC 285 VAC 475 VAC 570 VAC 690 VAC AC Input Undervoltage Trip 120 VAC 138 VAC 233 VAC 280 VAC 345 VAC Bus Overvoltage Trip 350 VDC 405 VDC 675 VDC 810 VDC 1013 VDC Bus Undervoltage Trip 160 VDC 160 VDC 300 VDC 300 VDC 375 VDC Nominal Bus Voltage 281 VDC 324 VDC 540 VDC 648 VDC 810 VDC All Drives Heat Sink Thermistor Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Drive Overcurrent Trip Software Current L
123. block has manual reference control 381 Dig Out1 Level Range 0 0to819 2 0 1 Default 0 0 Access 1 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs Seealso 380 Sets the relay activation level for options 10 15 in parameter 380 Digital Out1 Sel Units are assumed to match the selection of parameter 380 i e At Freq Hz At Torque Amps 382 Dig Outi OnTime Range 0 00 to 600 00 Sec 0 01 Sec Default 0 00 Sec Access 2 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs See also 380 Sets the on delay time for the digital outputs This is the time between the occurrence of a condition and activation of the relay 383 Dig Out OffTime Range 0 00 to 600 00 Sec 0 01 Sec Default 0 00 Sec Access 2 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs See also 380 Sets the off delay time for the digital outputs This is the time between the disappearance of a condition and de activation of the relay Dig Our OnTime 382 Q v E Relay Out1 380 Comparator Term 11 12 13 Dig Out1 Level 381 Figure 12 53 Dig Out1 OffTime 383 Parameter Descriptions 12 97 384 Digital Out2 Sel Any relay programmed as fault or alarm will energize pick up when power is applied to the drive and de energize drop out when a fault or alarm exists Relays selected for other functions will energize only when that condition exists and will de energize when the condition is removed 2Activation leve
124. bottom cover carefully to avoid damaging the gasket The front cover mounting screws are made of stainless steel Replacement screws must be stainless steel and of the same length Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment Mounting the Drive 3 1 3 1 3 1 1 General Requirements for the Installation Site It is important to properly plan before installing a SP600 AC drive to ensure that the drive s environment and operating conditions are satisfactory Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive If air cooled devices are mounted near the drive the hot air exhaust may raise the ambient temperature level above what is allowed for safe operation of the drive The area behind the drive must be kept clear of all control and power wiring Power connections may create electromagnetic fields that may interfere with control wiring or components when run in close proximity to the drive Read the recommendations in the following sections before continuing with drive installation Verifying Power Module AC Input Ratings Match Available Power SP600 drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering up to a maximum of 200 000 rms symmetrical amperes and a maximum of 600 volts nominal based on drive rating ATTENTION To guard against personal injury and or equipment damage caused by improper fusing or circuit breaker selection use only the recommended
125. by US NEC Exact size must be chosen for each installation Wiring Requirements for the Drive 4 11 Table 4 7 SP600 600 VAC Input Recommended Protection Devices Dual Element Time Delay Non time Fuse Delay Fuse Circuit Breaker 6SP501 0P9 Max i Max Max 6SP501 1P7 6SP501 2P7 6SP501 3P9 6SP501 6P1 6SP501 9P0 6SP501 011 6SP501 017 6SP501 022 6SP501 027 6SP501 032 6SP501 041 6SP501 052 Ratings shown are maximum protection without nuisance tripping Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maxi Circuit Breaker inverse time breaker For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA mum Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown are maximum Maximum allowable rating by US NEC Exact size must be chosen for each installation 4 12 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Finding Wire Routing Locations and Grounding the Drive This chapter shows entry areas where wiring is to be routed in and out of the drive and how to properly ground it 5 1 Routing Input Motor Output Ground and Control Wiring for the Drive All wiring must be installed in conformance with applicable local national and international codes such as NEC CEC Signal wiring control wiring and power w
126. cation of DC Bus Voltage Measuring Points 4 13 2 Figure 13 2 Location of the Ready LED serene 13 3 Figure 13 3 Sample Fault Screen on the LCD OIM ee eee 13 9 Figure 13 4 Accessing the Fault Queue sees eee eee 13 24 Figure 13 5 Sample Fault Queue Entry sse eee ee eee eee eee eee 13 24 Figure 13 6 Accessing the Fault Parameters ee eee ee eee ee 13 24 Figure 13 7 Accessing the Drive Status Parameters cceeeeee 13 25 Figure 13 8 Accessing the List of Changed Parameters sese 13 25 Contents VII Figure 13 9 Accessing the Device Version Information sese eee 13 26 Figure 13 10 Device Version Screens at Product and Component Levels sese eee ene 13 26 Figure 13 11 Accessing the OIM Version Informations sees eee e 13 27 Figure 13 12 OIM Version Screens at the Product and Component Levels sees eee eee 13 27 Figure 13 13 Accessing the Device ltem Information 13 27 VIII SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table 2 1 Identifying the NEMA 1 Drive by Erame sese eee 2 3 Table 2 2 Identifying the NEMA 4x 12 Drive by Eames sese eee 2 3 Table 2 3 208 240 VAC Power Ratings sese eee ee eee ee 2 4 Table 2 4 400 480 VAC Power Ratings sss eee ee 2 5 Table 2 5 600 VAC Power Ratings sse ee eee eee eee eee eee 2 6 Table 2 6 SP600 Drives EN1800 3 Second Environment Compatibility erene aa E ceding ee 2 20 Table 2 7 Communication Opti
127. ccess 2 Path Communication gt Datalinks See also Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table See figure 12 48 12 78 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 316 317 Data Out D1 Link D Word 1 Data Out D2 Link D Word 2 Range 0 to 387 1 Default 0 Disabled Access 2 Path Communication gt Datalinks See also Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table See figure 12 48 320 Anlg In Config Range See figure 12 49 Default See figure 12 49 Access 0 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs See also 322 323 325 326 Selects the type of input signal being used for analog input 1 and 2 These inputs can be configured as 10 VDC or 4 20 mA inputs See scaling parameters 322 323 Analog In1 and 325 326 Analog In2 Yo RLI Q 7 1 Current 0 Voltage x Reserved eo ebi x x x x x x x x Phas 12 1110 9 8 Nibble 4 Nibble 3 Bit Factory Default Bit Values Analog ln 0 to 10 VDC 4 to 20 mA Analog In2 10 to 10 VDC 4 to 20 mA Figure 12 49 Anlg In Config 320 Parameter Descriptions 12 79 321 Anlg In Sqr Root Range See figure 12 50 Default See figure 12 50 Access 2 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs See also Enables disables the square root function for each analog input This function is ty
128. ccording to drive type as shown in table 6 1 Table 6 1 Terminal Tightening Torques Horsepower Rating Maximum Tightening Torque 0 5 HP 5 HP 240 V 0 6 N m 5 in Ib 0 5 HP 10 HP 480 600 V 7 5 HP 10 HP 240 V 1 4 N m 12 in lb 15 HP 30 HP 480 600 V 40 HP 50 HP 480 V 2 7 Nem 27 in lb Installing Power Wiring 6 5 6 3 6 3 1 Installing Input Wiring Sections 6 3 1 to 6 3 4 describe incoming line components and how to install them Installing an Optional Transformer and Reactor Input isolation transformers might be needed to help eliminate S Damaging AC line voltage transients from reaching the drive Line noise from the drive back to the incoming power source S Damaging currents that could develop if a point inside the drive becomes grounded Observe these guidelines when installing an isolation transformer A power disconnecting device must be installed between the power line and the primary of the transformer If the user installed power disconnecting device is a circuit breaker the circuit breaker trip rating must be coordinated with the in rush current 10 to 12 times full load current of the transformer e Do not use an input isolation transformer rated more than 1000 KVA for 480 600 VAC 500 KVA for 208 VAC with less than 5 impedance directly ahead of the drive without additional impedance between the drive and the transformer Table 6 2 shows recommende
129. cess PI PI Upper Limit Speed Command gt Process PI Power Loss Mode Dynamic Control gt Stop Power Loss Power Loss Time Dynamic Control gt Stop Power Loss Power Up Marker Utility gt Faults Preset Speed 1 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Preset Speed 2 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Preset Speed 3 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Preset Speed 4 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Preset Speed 5 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Preset Speed 6 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Preset Speed 7 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Rated Amps Monitor gt Drive Data Rated kW Monitor gt Drive Data Parameters Cross Referenced by Name Parameter Name Rated Volts Path File gt Group Monitor gt Drive Data Reset Meters Utility gt Drive Memory Reset To Defalts Utility gt Drive Memory Run Boost Motor Control gt Volts per Hertz S Curve Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates Save MOP Ref Utility gt MOP Config Save OIM Ref Utility gt OIM Ref Config Save To User Set Utility gt Drive Memory Skip Freq Band Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Skip Frequency 1 Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Skip Frequency 2 Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Skip Frequency 3 Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Slip Comp Gain Speed Command gt Slip Comp Slip RPM
130. ciated with features or conditions If the bit is 0 the feature is off or the condition is false If the bit is 1 the feature is on or the condition is true Example Drive Status 1 209 e Numeric Parameters These parameters have a single numerical value for example 0 1 volts Example Maximum Freq 55 Parameters are also either configurable or tunable or read only Configurable parameters can be adjusted or changed only while the drive is stopped Tunable parameters can be adjusted or changed while the drive is running or stopped Read only parameters cannot be adjusted Programming Basics 11 1 11 2 How Parameters are Organized Parameters are organized into seven files e Monitor e Motor Control e Speed Command e Dynamic Control e Utility e Communication e Inputs amp Outputs Each file contains parameters that are grouped by their function A file can contain several groups of parameters See figure 11 1 File Motor fee ty Group Control e Pes Ne 2 Parameter fe a Motor Data NL E Motor Type Motor NP Volts Torq Attributes Torque Perf Mode Maximum Voltage Volts per D Hertz Start Acc Boost Run Boost Speed Command J Control Src D L Sel J Logic Source Sel Speed Ref A Sel Spd Mode amp Lims jJ Speed Mode Minimum Speed Figure 11 1 Example of Parameter Organization 11 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual
131. conomizer Mode sss sees seene 2 4 27 Fan CUNG sss LE COI ceini aeoaea es elena dose R 2 5 1 Essential Requirements for CE Compliance 2 19 Drive Connections sese eee eee eee eee eee 2 21 Drive Communication Options sss sss sese eee ee eee 2 23 Contents 2 8 Remote Operator Interface eee eee eee eee 2 23 2 8 1 Connecting the Remote OIM or VS Utilities to the S Eaa ade wien eileen i 2 23 2 9 PC Based Utility ssnsti tesan yd ek ctezo d 2 24 Mounting the Drive 3 1 General Requirements for the Installation Site 3 2 3 1 1 Verifying Power Module AC Input Ratings Match Available Power sees eee eree eee 3 2 3 1 1 1 Unbalanced or Ungrounded Distribution UG LT 3 3 3 1 1 2 Input Power Conditioning 0 3 4 3 1 2 Making Sure Environmental Conditions are Met 3 5 3 1 3 Minimum Mounting Clearances sss sese eee ee 3 6 3 1 4 Drive Dimensions and Weights 3 7 3 2 Mounting the Drive eee ee eeseeeeeeeeeesneeeesneeeeneeeeens 3 12 3 2 1 Verifying the Drive s Watts Loss Rating 3 15 Wiring Requirements for the Drive 4 1 Power WING siheiiviee ns ie iis eee 4 1 4 1 1 Power Wire Sizes eee 4 3 4 1 2 Using Input Output Contactors 0 00 eee 4 4 4 2 Control and Signal Wire eee eee eee 4 5 4 3 Recommended Motor Lead Lengha sse sees 4 5 4 3 1 Reflected Wave Compensation ceeeeee 4 7 4 4 Selecting Input Line Branch Circuit Protection 4 9 Finding Wire Routi
132. control 7 10 speed reference source configuring 10 6 Start Inhibits 214 12 64 Start Acc Boost 69 12 17 start stop control 10 5 starting the drive using the LCD OIM 9 17 start up considerations 10 5 Start Up menu 10 2 Start Up routines 10 1 Status 1 Fault 227 12 68 Status 2 Fault 228 12 68 stop circuit requirements 7 1 stop methods 2 8 Stop Mode A 155 12 40 Stop Mode B 156 12 40 Stop Owner 288 12 75 stopping the drive using the LCD Index Index 5 OIM 9 17 stopping user initiated 7 2 T TB Man Ref Hi 97 12 25 TB Man Ref Lo 98 12 26 TB Man Ref Sel 96 12 25 technical assistance 1 1 terminal block I O location 5 2 specifications 4 5 terminal block power location 5 2 specifications 4 3 test point codes and functions 13 17 Testpoint 1 Data 235 12 70 Testpoint 1 Sel 234 12 70 Testpoint 2 Data 237 12 70 Testpoint 2 Sel 236 12 70 thermal overload protection 2 11 thermal overload motor 12 9 three wire start stop control 10 6 time stamp fault queue 13 9 Torque Current 4 12 5 Torque Perf Mode 53 12 12 torques power terminal 6 5 Trim Hi 119 12 28 Trim In Select 117 12 27 Trim Lo 120 12 28 Trim Out Select 118 12 28 troubleshooting common symptoms and corrective actions 13 18 using the LCD OIM 13 23 two wire start stop control 10 6 U unbalanced distribution systems 3 3 ungrounded distribution systems
133. cts which bus regulation mode to use If this input function is not configured then Bus Reg Mode A selects which bus regulation mode to use 15 17 Speed Select 1 2 3 One two or three digital input functions can be used to select the speed reference used by the drive and they are called the Speed Select input functions The current open closed state of all Speed Select input functions combine to select which source is the current speed reference There are 8 possible combinations of open closed states for the three input functions and thus 8 possible parameters can be selected The 8 parameters are Speed Ref A Sel and Preset Speed 1 through Preset Speed 7 If the Speed Select input functions select Speed Ref A Sel then the value of that parameter further selects a reference source There are a large number of possible selections including all 6 presets If the input functions directly select one of the preset speed parameters then the parameter contains a frequency that is to be used as the reference The Speed Select input function configuration process involves assigning the functionality of the three possible Speed Select input functions to physical digital inputs The three Speed Select inputs functions are called Speed Select 1 Speed Select 2 and Speed Select 3 and they are assigned to physical inputs using the Digital In x Sel parameters Table 12 8 describes the various reference sources that can be selected usi
134. d DC Bus May be located to the left or right of the Power Terminal Block Figure 6 5 Power Terminal Block Early versions of the power terminal block are labeled DC and BRK Later versions are labeled BR1 and BR2 Figure 6 6 Power Input Terminals on the Internal RFI Filter Option SP600 AC Drive User Manual 6 4 Dynamic Braking Connections A dynamic brake consists of the 7th internal braking transistor and an optional dynamic brake resistor Reference SP600 AC Drive Dynamic Braking Guide manual number D2 3489 for a more detailed discussion of dynamic braking The internal dynamic braking circuit senses rising DC bus voltage and shunts the excess energy to the dynamic brake resistor The 7th transistor is either ON or OFF connecting the dynamic brake resistor to the DC bus or isolating the resistor from the DC bus It is important to properly size the braking resistor value To determine the minimum resistance value possible based on drive rating see table 6 3 Note that the resistor wattage is application dependent and should be sized to inertia deceleration and duty cycle requirements Figure 6 7 shows a simplified dynamic braking schematic DC Bus Dynamic Braking Resistor To Voltage Dividers Chopper Transistor LA LA Chopper Transistor Voltage Control DC Bus BR1 and BR2 are the connection poi
135. d access violations within the user s organization Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury The LCD OIM provides the option to restrict access to other parameter levels This feature requires the use of a user defined password when an attempt to change the access level is made To set the access level password select the Password icon from the main menu See figure 11 5 The password value can range from 1 to 9999 A value of 0 disables the password factory default Important You must either select Logout or return to the process display screen to activate the password gt gt Stopped PO SP600 Main Menu DOU 000 Password Set Acc Lvl R laro S Password g Set Access Lvl New Code be Bm Ez Set Acc Lvl PW set wrt Prot PW Set Wrt Prot PW V De Monit itor Lang lt gt Highlight Password icon F Highlight option A Ingrease decrease XIS Highlight Logout lt gt Move placeholder Activate password Figure 11 5 Setting the Access Level Password When you enter the password you can change access levels until you select Logout or return to the process display screen which re activates the password Refer to section 9 8 in chapter 9 for information about the process display screen Note that once
136. d and automatically resume running at commanded speed after drive input power is restored 0 Disabled The drive starts on the open to closed transition of the control source start input while no start inhibit conditions are present Edge sensitive detection 1 Enabled The drive starts while the control source start input is closed and no start inhibit conditions are present Level sensitive detection In this case if the drive is powered up and the input is closed the drive will automatically start Note that this feature LevelSense Start requires a digital input configured for run or start and a valid start contact 12 48 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 169 Flying Start En Range 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default 0 Disabled Access 2 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes Seealso 170 Enables disables the function which allows the drive to start into a spinning motor at actual RPM when a start command is issued Normally when a drive is started in its normal mode it initially applies a frequency of 0 Hz and ramps to the desired frequency If the drive is started into an already spinning motor in this manner without Flying Start enabled large currents will be generated and an overcurrent trip may result In Flying Start mode the drive s response to a start command will be to identify the motor s speed and apply a voltage that is synchronized in frequency amplitude and phase to the counter emf of the spinn
137. d inductance and line reactor ratings Table 6 2 AC Line Reactors Drive Hp Line Reactor Inductance 10 Fundamental Amp Rating 240 V 480 V 600 V SP600 AC Drive User Manual 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 Installing Branch Circuit Protection ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch protection be provided to protect input power wiring Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life Install the required branch circuit protection according to the applicable local national and international codes such as NEC CEC The fuses or approved circuit breaker must be installed in the line before the drive input terminals Fuse and circuit breaker values are provided in tables 4 5 through 4 7 Installing the Required External Separate Input Disconnect An input disconnect must be installed in the line before the drive input terminals in accordance with local national and international codes such as NEC CEC The disconnect should be sized according to the in rush current as well as any additional loads the disconnect might supply The trip rating for the in rush current 10 to 12 times full load current should be coordinated with that of the input isolation transformer if used Installing Power Wiring from the AC Input Line to the Drive s Power Terminals ATTENTION Protect the contents of the cabinet from metal chips a
138. d lengths The examples shown assume a maximum lead length of 200 feet SP600 SP600 SP600 SP600 Drive Drive Drive Drive 50 100 100 100 200 Moto 150 0 50 50 C GG ee Figure 4 1 How to Calculate Motor Lead Lengths Motor lead lengths in excess of 200 feet are possible provided proper conditions are met See table A 8 in Appendix A 4 6 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 4 3 1 Reflected Wave Compensation You must understand the effects and restrictions when applying the drive to extended motor lead length applications Proper cable type motor and drive selection is required to minimize the potential risks The reflected wave phenomenon also known as transmission line effect produces very high peak voltages on the motor due to voltage reflection Voltages in excess of twice the DC bus voltage 650 V DC nominal 480 V input result at the motor and can cause motor winding failure While Reliance Electric drives have patented software that limits the voltage peak to 2 times the DC bus voltage and reduce the number of occurrences many motors have inadequate insulation systems to tolerate these peaks The correction software modifies the PWM modulator to prevent PWM pulses less than a minimum time from being applied to the motor The minimum time between PWM pulses is 10 microseconds The modifications to the PWM modulator limit the overvoltage transient to 2 25 p
139. ditions and values Select the source for the analog output by setting Analog Out1 Sel 342 Refer to parameter 342 in chapter 12 for the analog output source options Digital Outputs The SP600 drive provides two relay outputs for external annunciation of a variety of drive conditions Each relay is a Form C 1 N O 1 N C with shared common device whose contacts and associated terminals are rated for a maximum of 250 VAC or 220 VDC See parameters 380 and 384 in chapter 12 for the drive conditions that can be annunciated About the Drive 2 7 2 4 4 2 4 5 2 4 6 Multiple Control Modes The SP600 drive provides a number of user selectable control modes to suit different applications Sensorless Vector S Sensorless Vector Economizer e Custom Volts per Hertz e Fan and Pump Volts per Hertz See the parameter description for Torque Perf Mode 53 in chapter 12 for the details of operation of each control mode Multiple Stop Methods There are several stop methods that can be selected using drive parameter 155 e Coast to Stop S Brake to Stop e Ramp to Stop S Ramp to Hold Refer to the parameter descriptions in chapter 12 for more information about these stop mode selections Another stop method dynamic braking uses an optional internal or external DB braking resistor to dissipate stopping energy See parameters 161 to 163 for more information about this feature Multiple Speed Control Methods The
140. drive You must assure that all terminal strip inputs are wired properly for your drive configuration Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life 7 AR T 22 SPEED REF INPUT 4 20MA 100 OHM INPUT IMPEDANCE AUTO REFERENCE 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 E L MAIN CONTROL BOARD TE 12 13 P362 3 Wire Dig In 2 Term 2 5 START 2 Wire Dig In 2 Term2 7 RUN remote OIM Arg 5S Se o Xo as g 8 3 gt 0 oaz gy NOWWOD 91907 WOO APE ON MANUAL 998 713S 0334S o FUNCTION LOSS AUTO S98 Sn ig Wag 9O 9 SSO7 NOILONNA o Z9 LUWLS gy SP600 AC Drive 198 SLINVA YYITO AOLS Parameter Access Level Advanced Chapter 11 PE PE L MOTOR Ti T2 T3 V C E POWER SECTION T BR1BR2 U POWER TERMINAL BLOCK AC INPUT 380 480 VAC Figure 7 1 I O Wiring Diagram Installing Control Wiring 7 7 Table 7 3 Parameter Configuration for Figure 7 1 Wiring Example Description Logic Source Sel Terminal Block Default Local OIM Spd Ref A Anlg 1 Local OIM Spd Ref A Hi 60 Hz Same as Max Speed Spd Ref A Lo 0 Hz 0 0 Hz TB Man Ref Anlg 2 Anlg 2 TB Man Ref Hi 60 Hz Same as Max Speed TB Man Ref Lo 0 Hz
141. e 80 must be set to 1 Slip Comp 123 Slip RPM Meter Range 0 0 to 300 0 RPM Default Read Only Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Slip Comp See also 80 121 122 Displays the present amount of slip adjustment being added to the motor commanded frequency Important Parameters in the Slip Comp Group 121 123 are used to enable and tune the slip compensation regulator To allow the slip compensation regulator to control drive operation Speed Mode 80 must be set to 1 Slip Comp Parameter Descriptions 12 29 124 PI Configuration Range See figure 12 13 Default See figure 12 13 Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Process PI See also 80 125 138 Selects specific features of the PI regulator See Appendix D Important Parameters in the Process PI Group are used to enable and tune the PI Loop To allow the PI Loop to control drive operation parameter 80 Speed Mode must be set to 2 Process PI K Nibble4 Nibble 3 i i x Reserved it Factory Default Bit Values x x x x x x x x 1 Enabled fi 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0 Disabled B Figure 12 13 PI Configuration 124 Bit 0 Excl Mode Exclusive Mode e Enabled Selects speed regulation The PI output can be used as the total speed reference command e Disabled Selects trim regulation The PI output is summed with Speed Ref A to generate the total speed command Bit 1 Invert Error e Enabl
142. e Voltage Break Voltage Start Accel Boost Run Boost er od Break Base Frequency Maximum Frequency Nameplate Frequency Figure 12 2 Custom V Hz Curve 3 Fan Pmp V Hz sets a fan load volts per hertz curve profile exponential to base frequency and linear from base to maximum frequency At low speed the fan curve can be offset by the Run Boost parameter 70 to provide necessary starting torque Refer to figure 12 3 12 12 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Maximum Voltage Base Voltage Nameplate Base Frequency Maximum Nameplate Frequency Figure 12 3 Fan Pump Curve 54 Maximum Voltage Range Rated Volts x 0 25 to Rated Volts 0 1 VAC Default Drive Rated Volts Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Torg Attributes See also Sets the highest voltage the drive will output 55 Maximum Freq OJ Range 5 0to 400 0 Hz 0 1 Hz Default 130 0 Hz Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Torg Attributes See also 82 83 Sets the maximum allowable frequency the drive will output Note that is not maximum speed which is set in parameter 82 Refer to figure 12 4 Maximum Speed 82 Overspeed Limit 83 must be lt Maximum Freq 55 Allowable Output Frequency Range _____y Bus Regulation or Current Limit lt Allowable Output Frequency Range gt v Normal Operation o l e Allowable Reference Frequency Range gt U l Max Volts t Motor Volts D Frequ
143. e a minimum insulation thickness of 15 mils and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity Shielded Armored Cable Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise generated by a typical AC drive Strong consideration for shielded cable should be given in installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales capacitive proximity switches and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications networking are also good candidates for shielded cable Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents for some applications In addition the increased impedance of shielded cable may help extend the distance that the motor can be located from the drive without the addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by the environment of the installation including temperature flexibility moisture characteristics and chemical resistance In addition a braided shield should be included and be specified by the cable manufacturer as having coverage of at least 75 An additional foil shield can greatly improve noise containment A good examp
144. e also 96 Analog input reference scaling Scales the upper value of the TB Man Ref Sel 96 selection when the source is an analog input Parameter 97 should be set in conjunction with Analog In 1 Hi 322 or Analog In 2 Hi 325 depending on the appropriate analog input used See figure 12 51 Parameter Descriptions 12 25 98 TB Man Ref Lo Range Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz Default 0 0 Hz Access 1 Path Speed Command gt Speed References See also 96 Analog input reference scaling Scales the lower value of the TB Man Ref Sel 96 selection when the source is an analog input Parameter 98 should be set in conjunction with Analog In 1 Lo 323 or Analog In 2 Lo 326 depending on the appropriate analog input used See figure 12 51 100 Jog Speed Range Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz Default 10 0 Hz Access 0 Path Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds See also Sets the output frequency when a jog command is issued The jog function can be activated from the terminal block or OIM keypad 101 Preset Speed 1 102 Preset Speed 2 103 Preset Speed 3 104 Preset Speed 4 105 Preset Speed 5 106 Preset Speed 6 107 Preset Speed 7 Range Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz Default See table 12 2 Access 101 0 Path Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds 102 107 2 See also 90 Provides an internal fixed speed command value when Speed Ref A is set to one of the Preset Speed 1 7 internal references Alterna
145. e internal values that are not accessible through parameters Note This is a factory diagnostic function 237 Testpoint 2 Data Range 0 to 4 294 967 295 1 Default 0 Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 236 The present value of the function selected in Testpoint 2 Sel 236 Note This is a factory diagnostic function 12 70 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 238 Fault Config 1 Range See figure12 41 Default See figure12 41 Access 2 Path Utility gt Faults See also Enables disables annunciation of the faults shown in figure 12 41 See table 13 6 for fault descriptions he 5 E SIIN E GIS ANS x x x x x x x x x 1 0 0 1 x 1 0 1 Enabled 151413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0j O Disabled 7 Nibble4 Nibble3 Nibble2 Nibble1 Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Figure 12 41 Fault Config 1 238 240 Fault Clear Range 0 Ready 1 Clear Faults 2 Clr Fit Que Default 0 Ready Access 2 Path Utility gt Faults See also Resets a fault and clears the fault queue 241 Fault Clear Mode Range 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default 1 Enabled Access 2 Path Utility gt Faults See also Enables disables a fault reset clear faults attempt from any source This does not apply to fault codes stored in the fault queue which are cleared via other actions Parameter Descriptions 12 71 242 Power Up Marker Range 0 0
146. e rate specified in Accel Time 1 140 Accel Time 2 141 Decel Time 1 142 and Decel Time 2 143 Be aware that an abrupt speed change may occur depending upon the new reference level and the rate specified in these parameters Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury ATTENTION Note the following about stop commands e A stop command from any attached OIM will always be enabled regardless of the value of Logic Source Sel Network stop commands are effective only when Logic Source Sel is set to Network or All Ports Terminal block stop commands are effective only when Logic Source Sel is set to Terminal BIk or All Ports Failure to observe these precautions could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life Parameter Descriptions 12 21 Important The drive is shipped from the factory configured for local OIM keypad control For drive control from the terminal block inputs Logic Source Sel 89 must be set to 0 Terminal Blk Logic Source Sel 89 defines the control source for the following logic commands see figure 12 9 e Start e Jog e Clear Faults e Direction e Stop e Run 0 Terminal BIk Hardware I O control 1 Local OIM Drive mounted OIM 2 DPI Port 2 DIN connector DPI port 3 DPI Port 3 DIN port 2 split with option cable 4 Reserved 5 Network Communications interface 6 Reserved 7 All Ports All control sources active Important Asserting
147. e will decrease at the rate contained in MOP Rate The rate units are Hz per second If both the MOP Increment and MOP Decrement inputs are closed the MOP value will stay the same In order for the drive to use the MOP value as the current speed reference Speed Ref A Sel must be set to MOP 25 OIM Control This input provides a means to override the logic control source selection and can be used to override control from any port including the All Ports selection An open to closed transition of this input sets the control source to the local OIM If no local OIM is present the control source is set to the remote OIM If no OIM is present at all the drive stops When control is set to the OIM the OIM is granted manual reference the Man Ref Preload 193 configuration is enforced Subsequent Auto Manual commands will toggle the OIM in and out of manual mode The drive s active or stopped state is not affected unless no OIM is present On a closed to open transition manual control is released if active and the selected auto reference is used The logic source select override is removed The edge level sense start configuration is imposed LevelSense Start 26 PI Enable If this input function is closed the operation of the Process PI loop will be enabled If this input function is open the operation of the Process PI loop will be disabled 27 PI Hold If this input function is closed the integrator for the Proces
148. e will stop if already jogging but can be started by other means Open Closed Drive jogs in reverse direction Closed Open Drive jogs in forward direction Closed Closed Drive continues to jog in current direction ATTENTION If a normal drive start command is received while the drive is jogging the drive will switch from jog mode to run mode The drive will not stop but may change speed and or change direction Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life The drive will not jog while running or while the Stop Clear Faults input is open Start has precedence over jog If one of these input functions is configured and the other one is not 12 90 SP600 AC Drive User Manual table 12 7 still applies but the unconfigured input function should be considered permanently open 13 Stop Mode B This digital input selects between two different drive stop modes If the input is open then Stop Mode A selects which stop mode to use If the input is closed the Stop Mode B selects which stop mode to use If this input function is not configured then Stop Mode A selects which stop mode to use 14 Bus Regulation Mode B This digital input function selects how the drive will regulate excess voltage on the DC bus If the input is open then Bus Reg Mode A selects which bus regulation mode to use If the input is closed then Bus Reg Mode B sele
149. ear Utility gt Faults Fault Clear Mode Utility gt Faults Fault Config 1 Utility gt Faults Fault Frequency Utility gt Diagnostics Flux Current Monitor gt Metering Flux Current Ref Motor Control gt Torg Attributes Flux Up Mode Motor Control gt Torq Attributes Flux Up Time Motor Control gt Torq Attributes Flying Start En Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes Flying StartGain Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes IR Voltage Drop Motor Control gt Torg Attributes Jog Speed Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Language Utility gt Drive Memory Last Stop Source Utility gt Diagnostics LevelSense Start Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes Load Frm Usr Set Utility gt Drive Memory Logic Source Sel Speed Command gt Control Src Select Man Ref Preload Utility gt OIM Ref Config Manual Mask Communication gt Masks amp Owners Manual Owner Communication gt Masks amp Owners Maximum Freq Motor Control gt Torq Attributes Maximum Speed Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Maximum Voltage Motor Control gt Torq Attributes Minimum Speed Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits MOP Frequency Monitor gt Metering MOP Rate Utility gt MOP Config Motor NP FLA Motor Control gt Motor Data Motor NP Hertz Motor Control gt Motor Data Motor NP Power Motor Control
150. ected to the drive can have a different timeout period Using the LCD OIM 9 15 9 8 5 9 9 Selecting Reverse Video for the Process Display Screen To select normal or reverse video for the process display screen select Display Video from the Display menu See figure 9 14 for sample screens Note that each OIM connected to the drive can have a different display mode gt gt Stopped 2 Auto gt gt stopped Auto pl PO SP600 PO SP600 0 00 Volts Kee Volts 0 00 Amps Reem Amps 0 00 Hz ORO Hz Luset Fitq iuset __ Fita Normal Video Reverse Video Figure 9 14 Selecting Reverse Video for the Process Display Screen Controlling the Drive From the LCD OIM When the OIM is the selected control source it can be used to control the drive e Start Run e Stop e Clear Faults e Jog e Select direction Note that pressing two OIM keys at the same time will cause no command to be sent to the drive For example attempting to change direction while jogging from the same OIM will cause the drive to stop 9 16 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 9 9 1 9 9 2 9 9 3 Selecting the Logic and Reference Source ATTENTION Removing and replacing the LCD OIM while the drive is running may cause an abrupt speed change if the LCD OIM is the selected reference source but is not the selected control source The drive will ramp to the reference level provided by the OIM
151. ed for the connection port to which the remote OIM is attached Typically a remote OIM is connected to port 2 or port 3 7 12 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Figure 7 4 Speed Reference Selection Z Fold Here PO Figure 7 4 Speed Reference Selection Installing Control Wiring 7 13 Installing Control Wiring 7 14 Completing the Installation This chapter provides instructions on how to perform a final check of the installation before power is applied to the drive ATTENTION Only qualified electrical personnel familiar with the construction and operation of this equipment and the hazards involved should start and adjust it Read and understand this manual in its entirety before proceeding Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life 8 1 Checking the Installation ATTENTION DC bus capacitors retain hazardous voltages after input power has been disconnected After disconnecting input power wait five minutes for the DC bus capacitors to discharge and then check the voltage with a voltmeter to ensure the DC bus capacitors are discharged before touching any internal components Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life ATTENTION You must provide an external hardwired emergency stop circuit outside of the drive circuitry This circuit must disable the system in case of improper operation Uncontrolled machine operation
152. ed level 0 Disabled No preload of the Auto speed setpoint into the manual setpoint In this case the motor reference will switch automatically to the internal Manual setpoint 1 Enabled The Manual setpoint will be loaded with the present running speed 12 54 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 194 Save MOP Ref Range See figure 12 26 Default See figure 12 26 Access 2 Path Utility gt MOP Config See also Enables disables the feature that saves the present MOP motor operated potentiometer frequency reference at power down and or at stop If the drive is re started or powered up the setpoint will be restored with the last active MOP output value 0 1 Save 0 0 Do Not Save x Reserved LUE x w x E olx Ss ba Nh S ba a x x x x x x x x x race 10 9 8 7 Nibble 4 Nibble 3 Bit Factory Default Bit Values Figure 12 26 Save MOP Ref 194 Important The MOP feature requires that the digital inputs be configured for MOP Inc and MOP Dec see 361 366 MOP Inc sh Z Dig ln MOP Dec Dig In L 2 Dig In Q Dig ln Z 24V Figure 12 27 Configuring Digital Inputs for MOP Inc and MOP Dec 195 MOP Rate Range 0 2 to Maximum Freq 0 1 Hz sec Default 1 0 Hz sec Access 2 Path Utility gt MOP Config See also Sets the rate of change of the MOP reference in response to a digital input Parame
153. ed limit 16 DC Braking The drive is currently executing either a DC Brake or a Ramp to Hold stop command and the DC braking voltage is still being applied to the motor 17 Curr Limit The drive is currently limiting output current 18 Economize The drive is currently reducing the output voltage to the motor to attempt to reduce energy costs during a lightly loaded situation 19 Motor Overld The drive has detected a motor overload 20 Power Loss The drive has monitored DC bus voltage and sensed a loss of input AC power that caused the DC bus voltage to fall below the fixed monitoring value 73 of DC Bus Memory when power loss mode is set to coast and 82 of DC Bus Memory when power loss mode is set to decel See parameters 13 and 184 21 Input 1 Link Outputs the state of digital input 1 22 Input 2 Link Outputs the state of digital input 2 23 Input 3 Link Outputs the state of digital input 3 Parameter Descriptions 12 99 24 Input 4 Link Outputs the state of digital input 4 25 Input 5 Link Outputs the state of digital input 5 26 Input 6 Link Outputs the state of digital input 6 27 TB in Manual Terminal block has manual reference control 385 Dig Out2 Level Range 0 0 to 819 2 0 1 Default 0 0 Access 1 Path Inputs amp Output gt Digital Outputs See also 384 Sets the relay activation level for options 10 15 in parameter 384 Digital Out2 Sel Units are assumed to ma
154. eed range Efficiency 97 5 at rated amps nominal line volts Maximum Short Circuit Rating 200 000 amps symmetrical Actual Short Circuit Rating Method Determined by amps interrupting capacity AIC rating of installed fuse circuit breaker Table A 5 Control Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency Ratings apply to all drives The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 12 pulse ina configured package Carrier Frequency A to D Frame Drives 2 4 8 and 10 kHz Drive rating based on 4 kHz Output Voltage Range 0 to rated motor voltage Output Frequency Range 0 to 400 Hz Frequency Accuracy Digital Input Analog Input Within 0 01 of set output frequency Within 0 4 of maximum output frequency Selectable Motor Control Sensorless vector with full tuning Standard V Hz with full custom capability Speed Regulation Open 0 5 of base speed across a 40 1 speed Loop with Slip range Compensation Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp Coast DC Brake Ramp to Hold and S curve Accel Decel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 to 3600 seconds in 0 1 second increments Intermittent Overload 110 overload capability for up to 1 minute 150 overload capability for up to 3 seconds Current Limit Capability Proactive Current Limit programmable from 20 to
155. eee eee 7 11 7 6 Remote OIM Configuration sese eee eee ee ee eee 7 12 Completing the Installation 8 1 Checking the Installation ee eee eee eee eee 8 1 8 2 Powering Up after Installation is Complete 8 2 Using the LCD OIM 9 1 Conne ctions 2c ccc cei dad niente iis 9 1 9 2 Installing and Removing the Local LCD OIM NEMA 1 Drives Only vated Svat sx Es oe Aa A aer Aae TE 9 2 9 2 1 Removing the Local LCD OIM While the Drive is Powered cisne iao aia det ia diene a 9 2 9 3 Display Description sss sees eee eree eee eee 9 3 9 3 1 Key Descripiong sss ssscessee esec ee eers eree neee 9 4 9 4 LCD OIM Menu Structure sss sese eee eee eee 9 5 9 5 Powering Up and Adjusting the LCD OIM sss see 9 6 9 5 1 Selecting the Fast Power Up Feature 9 6 9 5 2 Adjusting the Screen Contrast eee eee eee 9 6 9 5 3 Resetting the Display ee eee eee eee eee eee 9 6 9 6 Selecting a Device in the System eee ee eee 9 6 9 7 Using the LCD OIM to Program the Drive sse eee eee 9 6 9 7 1 Viewing and Adjusting Parameters see 9 7 9 7 2 Loading and Saving User Sete sees eee 9 8 9 8 Monitoring the Drive Using the Process Display Screen on the Bele 9 10 9 8 1 Displaying and Changing the OIM Reference 9 11 9 8 2 Customizing the Process Display Screen 9 12 9 8 3 Customizing the Function Keys sees eee 9 12 9 8 3 1 Customizing the Function Key Label TOXU aiai ta ae nani 9 15 9 8 4 Setting the Display Timeout Period
156. efer to the appropriate communications module manual for more information about Datalinks 306 Data In D1 Link D Word 1 307 Data In D2 Link D Word 2 Range 0 to 387 1 Co Default 0 Disabled Access 2 Path Communication gt Datalinks See also Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table Refer to figure 12 47 Parameters that can be changed only while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs Entering a parameter of this type will disable the link Refer to the appropriate communications module manual for more information about Datalinks Parameter Descriptions 12 77 310 311 Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 Range 0 to 387 1 Default 0 Disabled Access 2 Path Communication gt Datalinks See also Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table Refer to figure 12 48 Network Module h Network SP600 Drive Figure 12 48 Data Sent By the Drive To the Network 312 313 Data Out B1 Link B Word 1 Data Out B2 Link B Word 2 Range 0 to 387 1 Default 0 Disabled Access 2 Path Communication gt Datalinks See also Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table See figure 12 48 314 315 Data Out C1 Link C Word 1 Data Out C2 Link C Word 2 Range 0 to 387 1 Default 0 Disabled A
157. elines SP600 Ambient Termperature Load Class Enclosure Open NEMA Type 1 IP20 Flange 2 10 kHz Derate Open NEMA Type 1 IP20 Flange 2 10 kHz NEMA Type 2 8 kHz 1 Flange 10 kHz NEMA Type 1 Flange NEMA Type 4X12 NEMA Type 1 Flange NEMA Type 4x 12t 2 6 kHz 8 10 kHz 2 4 kHz 6 12 kHz Ambient Temp A G wo G N o 60 70 80 Full Load Amps NEMA Type 4X 12 D frame drives have a maximum ambient of 40 degrees C T NEMA Type 4X 12 D frame drives have a maximum ambient of 40 degrees C Technical Specifications A 9 Table A 9 Maximum Motor Lead Lengths 1488 V Motor 1000 V Motor 1200 V Motor NEMA MG 1 1988 1600 V Motor Carrier Freq kHz Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded OO EM ad OO EM OO EM ZE DO EM 2 4 6 8 de sale COON aR zavann ZO KMI Zo KM ZOO KM A 10 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table A 9 Maximum Motor Lead Lengths 1488 V Motor 1000 V Motor 1200 V Motor NEMA MG 1 1988 1600 V Motor Carrier Freq kHz Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded ER ZODAN En ZODAN En ZODAN Lead length limited due to cable charging current Table A 10 Drive Output Power vs Voltage Input Drive Rating Nominal
158. en the fault occurred relative to the last drive power up The time stamp is cleared when the fault queue is cleared Refer to section 13 8 1 for information on accessing the fault queue using the LCD OIM Refer to instruction manual D2 3488 for information on accessing the fault queue using VS Utilities software Clearing Faults A fault condition can be cleared by the following ESC Step 1 Press or any F Key to acknowledge the fault and remove the fault pop up from the LCD OIM screen Step 2 Address the condition that caused the fault The cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared Step 3 After corrective action has been taken clear the fault using one of the following e Set Fault Clear 240 1 Clear Faults e Press F1 Cflt from the fault queue screen e Issue a Stop Clear Faults command from the control source Resetting faults will clear the faulted status indication If any fault condition still exists the fault will be latched and another entry made in the fault queue Note that performing a fault reset does not clear the fault queue Clearing the fault queue is a separate action See the Fault Clear 240 parameter description 13 10 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 13 4 3 Fault Descriptions and Corrective Actions Table 13 6 describes drive faults and corrective actions It also indicates if the fault is Auto resettable Non resettable User configurable Fault 9 Z
159. en to closed transition on one or both Parameter Descriptions 12 89 inputs while the drive is stopped will cause the drive to run unless the Stop Clear Faults input function is configured and open If one or both of these input functions are assigned to more than one physical digital input at a time a digital input configuration alarm will be asserted 10 Jog An open to closed transition on this input while the drive is stopped causes the drive to start jog in the current direction When the input opens while the drive is running jogging the drive will stop ATTENTION If a normal drive start command is received while the drive is jogging the drive will switch from jog mode to run mode The drive will not stop but may change speed and or change direction Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life The drive will not jog while running or while the Stop Clear Faults input is open Start has precedence over jog 11 and 12 Jog Forward and Jog Reverse An open to closed transition on one or both inputs while the drive is stopped will cause the drive to jog unless the Stop Clear Faults input function is configured and open Table 12 7 describes the actions taken by the drive in response to various states of these input functions Table 12 7 Drive Response to Jog Forward and Jog Reverse Inputs Jog Forward Open Jog Reverse Open Drive Response Driv
160. ency Trim due to H Overspeed _ J Speed Control Mode Limit Start Boost Run l l Break Volts s R i i l 0 Min Break 1 Output Max Speed Frequency Speed Fred Um Freq Frequency Figure 12 7 Speed Limits Parameter Descriptions 12 19 84 Skip Frequency 1 85 Skip Frequency 2 86 Skip Frequency 3 Range 400 0 Hz Default 0 0 Hz Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits See also 87 Sets the center of a frequency band at which the drive will not operate continuously also called an avoidance frequency Requires that both Skip Frequency 1 2 or 3 and Skip Frequency Band 87 be set to a value other than 0 87 Skip Freq Band Range 0 0 to 30 0 Hz 0 1 Hz Default 0 0 Hz Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits See also 84 85 86 Determines the bandwidth around a skip frequency half the band above and half the band below the skip frequency This value applies to all skip frequencies If the commanded drive frequency is greater than or equal to the skip center frequency and less than or equal to the high value of the band skip plus 1 2 band the drive will set the output frequency to the high value of the band See A in figure 12 8 If the commanded drive frequency is less than the skip center frequency and greater than or equal to the low value of the band skip minus 1 2 band the drive will set the output frequency to the lo
161. ency Trim due to Overspeed g gt Speed Control Mode Limit gt e Break Volts l 4 55 s Start Boost l l Runy l l 4 0 Min Break Motor Max Output Max Speed Frequency Hz Speed Fred Limit Freq Frequency Figure 12 4 Speed Limits Parameter Descriptions 12 13 56 Compensation Range See figure 12 5 Default See figure 12 5 Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Torq Attributes See also Enables disables the compensation correction options TK WAZ RY LY Roy z 1 Enabled 0 Disabled x Reserved Ee SI ojx ojx Aix x S als S D k x x x x x x x x x race 10 9 8 7 Nibble 4 Nibble 3 N Bit Factory Default Bit Values Figure 12 5 Compensation 56 Bit 0 Reflect Wave e Enables disables reflected wave correction software which reduces overvoltage transients from the drive to the motor For lead lengths beyond 300 feet enable this feature Bit 1 Enable Jerk e Enables disables the jerk limit in the current limiter that helps to eliminate overcurrent trips on fast accelerations Disable this feature if your application requires the actual acceleration of the motor to be faster than 25 sec 57 Flux Up Mode Range 0 Manual 1 Automatic Default 0 Manual Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Torg Attributes See also 53 58 Flux up current is the amount of DC current
162. equent power ups if both of these requirements have been met the Main Menu is displayed after the initialization screen 9 5 1 Selecting the Fast Power Up Feature The fast power up feature bypasses the initialization screen at power up and the Main Menu is displayed immediately To select this feature select Fast PwrUp Mode from the Display menu 9 5 2 Adjusting the Screen Contrast To adjust the screen contrast select Contrast from the Display menu 9 5 3 Resetting the Display To return all the options for the display to factory default values select Reset Display from the Display menu 9 6 Selecting a Device in the System The LCD OIM can access and display data from any active drive or peripheral device on the network The drive port 0 is the default device selected To select a device select the Device Select icon from the Main Menu The options listed depend on what is connected to the network The name and DPI port number of the device being accessed is shown on the OIM s display see figure 9 3 9 7 Using the LCD OIM to Program the Drive The LCD OIM enables you to view and adjust parameters in the drive or in peripheral devices connected to the drive The parameters available for viewing or adjustment depend on the device selected See section 9 6 for information about selecting a device The method of viewing and adjusting parameters is the same regardless of the device selected 9 6 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 9 7 1
163. er or an assigned digital input PI control allows the drive to take a reference signal setpoint and an actual signal feedback from an external transducer such as position flow or pressure so that the motor speed can be adjusted to maintain control over the external variable Proportional control P adjusts the output based on the size of the error larger error proportionally larger correction Integral control I adjusts the output based on the duration of the error The integral control by itself is a ramp output correction This type of control gives a smoothing effect to the output and will continue to integrate until zero error is achieved By itself integral control is slower than many applications require and therefore is combined with proportional control Pl There are two ways the PI regulator can be configured to operate see parameter 124 e Process trim which takes the output of the PI regulator and sums it with a master speed reference to control the process e Process control which takes the output of the PI regulator as the speed command No master speed reference exists and the PI output directly controls the drive output Note that Speed Mode 80 must be set to Process PI 2 Parameter Descriptions 12 31 Nibble 4 Nibble 3 i i x Reserved X xX x x x x x x 1 Enabled rr 14 13 12 1110 9 8 0 Disabled Bit Factory Default Bit
164. er unit volts line to line peak at 600 feet of cable 400 V Line 540V DC bus max x 2 25 1200 V S 480 V Line 715V DC bus max x 2 25 1600 V e 600 V Line 891V DC bus max x 2 25 2000 V Parameter 56 is used to enable or disable this feature Refer to the parameter description in chapter 12 for more information Figure 4 2 shows the inverter line to line output voltage top trace and the motor line to line voltage bottom trace for a 10 HP 460 V AC inverter and an uploaded 10 HP AC induction motor at 60 Hz operation 500 ft of 12 AWG PVC cable connects the drive to the motor f 500 Inverter Nain lt Ta E L IRON Motor Figure 4 2 Inverter and Motor Line to line Voltages Wiring Requirements for the Drive 4 7 Initially the cable is in a fully charged condition A transient disturbance occurs by discharging the cable for approximately 4 ms The propagation delay between the inverter terminals and motor terminals is approximately 1 ms The small time between pulses of 4 ms does not provide sufficient time to allow the decay of the cable transient Thus the second pulse arrives at a point in the motor terminal voltage s natural response and excites a motor overvoltage transient greater than 2 pu The amplitude of the double pulsed motor overvoltage is determined by a number of variables These include the damping characteristics of the cab
165. erial communications protocol that provides high functionality and high performance The serial DPI connection is used for devices such as Operator Interface Modules OIMs PC interface tool VS Utilities and network communications modules 2 4 17 Network Data Transfer via Datalinks A Datalink see parameters 300 to 317 is one of the mechanisms used by SP600 drives to transfer data to and from a programmable controller via the optional network communications modules DeviceNet or ControlNet In the case of ControlNet Datalinks allow a parameter value to be changed without using an Explicit Message or Block Transfer 2 12 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Each Datalink A B C or D transfers two 16 bit values A1 A2 If a 32 bit value needs to be transferred each of the two 16 bit Datalinks must be set to the same parameter One Datalink transfers the lower 16 bits the other the upper 16 bits For example to set up the drive to receive accel and decel times from the connected PLC you would make the following parameter settings Data In A1 300 140 the parameter number of Accel Time 1 Data In A2 301 142 the parameter number of Decel Time 1 Refer to parameters 300 through 317 in chapter 12 and the appropriate network communications manual for more information about using Datalinks 2 4 18 Programmable Parameter Access Levels and Protection The SP600 drive allows you to limit the number of parameters that ca
166. erspeed Limit 83 12 19 P Param Access Lvl 196 12 56 parameters access levels 2 13 11 5 accessing using LCD OIM 11 3 accessing using VS Utilities 11 3 cross referenced by name B 1 to B 7 descriptions 12 1 to 12 101 organization 11 2 Quickstart 10 3 record of user settings E 1 to E 6 security 2 13 types 11 1 viewing and adjusting using LCD OIM 9 7 password access level 11 6 write protect 11 7 passwords about 2 13 PE ground 5 3 PI Configuration 124 12 30 PI Control 125 12 31 PI control about 12 31 PI Error Meter 137 12 37 PI Fdback Meter 136 12 37 PI Feedback Sel 128 12 34 PI Integral Time 129 12 34 PI Lower Limit 131 12 35 PI Output Meter 138 12 37 PI Preload 133 12 35 PI Prop Gain 130 12 34 PI Ref Meter 135 12 36 PI Reference Sel 126 12 33 PI Setpoint 127 12 33 Index 4 SP600 AC Drive User Manual PI Status 134 12 36 PI Upper Limit 132 12 35 plugs sealing unused conduit holes with 6 3 Power Loss Mode 184 12 52 Power Loss Time 185 12 52 power terminal block specifications 4 3 Power Up Marker 242 12 72 power wire sizes 4 3 power wiring 4 1 to 4 3 preset frequency 2 9 Preset Speed 1 101 12 26 Preset Speed 2 102 12 26 Preset Speed 3 103 12 26 Preset Speed 4 104 12 26 Preset Speed 5 105 12 26 Preset Speed 6 106 12 26 Preset Speed 7 107 12 26 process display screen LCD OIM 9 10 Process PI block diagram D 1 P
167. es disables the option to invert the sign of the PI error signal Enabling this feature creates a decrease in output for an increasing error and an increase in output for a decreasing error Bit 2 Preload Mode s Enabled Initializes the PI integrator to the commanded speed while the PI is disabled e Disabled The PI integrator is loaded with the PI Preload 133 while the PI is disabled Bit 3 Ramp Ref e Enables disables ramping the PI reference from the PI Feedback to the PI Reference This is used to preload the PI reference with the actual PI feedback signal at time of enable This will result in a smooth ramping of the PI output The ramp time used is set by the active ramps parameters 140 143 12 30 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Bit 4 Zero Clamp e Enables disables option to limit operation so that the output frequency of the PI regulator always has the same sign as the master speed reference This limits the possible drive action to one direction only Output from the drive will be from zero to maximum frequency forward or zero to maximum frequency reverse Bit 5 Feedback Sqrt Square Root Feedback e Enables disables the option of using the square root of the feedback signal as the PI feedback 125 PI Control Range See figure 12 14 Default See figure 12 14 Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Process PI See also 124 138 Controls the PI regulator You can control the bits from a Datalink network paramet
168. et 5 Auto Preset 6 Auto Preset 7 Auto k ek k b COCO K r 9 G K r 9 9 wa a k C h 0 0 Figure 12 43 Drive Logic Rslt 271 272 Drive Ref Rslt Range 0 to 32767 1 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Communication gt Comm Control See also Displays the present frequency reference scaled as a DPI reference for peer to peer communications The value shown is the output prior to the accel decel ramp and any corrections supplied by slip comp PI etc Parameter Descriptions 12 73 273 Drive Ramp Rslt Range 0 to 32767 1 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Communication gt Comm Control See also Displays the present frequency reference scaled as a DPI reference for peer to peer communications The value shown is the value after the accel decel ramp but prior to any corrections supplied by slip comp PI etc 286 Manual Mask Range See figure 12 44 Default See figure 12 44 Access 2 Path Communication gt Masks amp Owners See also Disables manual requests at the port corresponding to bit number Nibble 4 Nibble 3 x Reserved x x x x x x x x 1 Enabled fii 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0 Disabled B it Factory Default Bit Values Figure 12 44 Manual Mask 286 Example of manual mode selection source If e Bit 0 0 Terminal block disabled e Bit 1 1 Local OIM enabled Then manual mode selection c
169. eters SP600 AC Drive User Manual Parameter Descriptions The following information is provided for each parameter listed in table 12 1 along with its description Parameter Number Unique number assigned to each parameter Parameter Name Unique name assigned to each parameter Range Predefined parameter limits or selections Note that a negative Hz value indicates reverse rotation Default Factory default setting Access Parameter access level 0 Basic reduced parameter set 1 Standard reduced parameter set 2 Advanced full parameter set Path Menu selections to reach specified parameter The path is indicated in this manner File gt Group See also Associated parameters that may provide additional or related information What the Symbols Mean Meaning 32 bit parameter Drive must be stopped before changing parameter value The parameters are presented in numerical order Appendix B contains a list of parameters by name cross referenced to parameter number Parameter Descriptions 12 1 Table 12 1 Parameter List Parameter Name K Parameter Name Output Freq Start Acc Boost Commanded Freq Run Boost Output Current Break Voltage Torque Current Break Frequency Flux Current Speed Mode Output Voltage Minimum Speed Output Power Maximum Speed Output Power Fctr Overspeed Limit Elapsed MWh Skip Frequency 1 Elapsed Run Time Skip Frequency 2 MOP Frequency Skip Frequency 3 DC Bus
170. f the drive power section 219 Drive OL Count Range 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 150 Displays the accumulated percentage of drive overload Continuously operating the drive over 100 of its rating will increase the value of Drive OL Count to 100 and cause a drive fault or foldback depending on the setting of Drive OL Mode 150 12 66 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 220 Motor OL Count Range 0 0 to 100 0 1 0 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 47 48 Displays the accumulated percentage of motor overload Continuously operating the motor over 100 of the motor overload setting will increase the value of Motor OL Count to 100 and cause a drive fault 224 Fault Frequency Range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 1 Hz Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 225 230 Captures and displays the output frequency of the drive at the time of the last fault 225 Fault Amps Range 0 0 to Rated Amps x 2 0 1 Amps Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 224 230 Captures and displays motor amps at the time of the last fault 226 Fault Bus Volts Range 0 0 to Max Bus Volts 0 1 VDC Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 224 230 Captures and displays the DC bus voltage of the drive at the time of the last fault Parameter Descriptions 12 67
171. g In 1 Hi 322 or Analog In 2 Hi 325 See figure 12 51 120 Trim Lo Range Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz Default 0 0 Hz Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Speed Trim See also 117 Analog reference scaling Scales the lower value of the Trim In Select 117 selection when the source is an analog input This value should be set in conjunction with Analog In 1 Lo 323 or Analog In 2 Lo 326 See figure 12 51 12 28 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 121 Slip RPM FLA Range 0 0 to 1200 0 RPM Default Based on Motor NP RPM Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Slip Comp Seealso 61 80 122 123 Sets the amount of slip compensation to be added to the drive output at 100 motor load If parameter 61 Autotune 3 Calculate changes made to this parameter will not be accepted Important Parameters in the Slip Comp Group 121 123 are used to enable and tune the slip compensation regulator To allow the slip compensation regulator to control drive operation Speed Mode 80 must be set to 1 Slip Comp 122 Slip Comp Gain Range 1 0to 100 0 0 1 Default 40 0 Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Slip Comp See also 80 121 122 Sets the response time of slip compensation Increasing the value will increase the slip compensation response Important Parameters in the Slip Comp Group 121 123 are used to enable and tune the slip compensation regulator To allow the slip compensation regulator to control drive operation Speed Mod
172. ges based on Accel Decel time 9 9 5 Jogging the Drive When the OIM is the selected control source pressing sends a jog command to the motor as long as the key is pressed 9 18 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Starting Up the Drive Using the LCD OIM ATTENTION Only qualified electrical personnel familiar with the construction and operation of this equipment and the hazards involved should install adjust operate or service this equipment Read and understand this chapter in its entirety before proceeding Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life ATTENTION Incorrect values for some of the parameters in the Start Up routines can cause the drive to operate improperly Verify that the values of these parameters are appropriate for your application Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury For standard applications the Start Up routines on the LCD OIM enable you to configure the most commonly used parameters through a series of steps This helps you set up the drive as quickly as possible For advanced applications you may need to adjust additional parameters in the parameter list using either the LCD OIM or VS Utilities software 10 1 Preparing for Start Up Before performing Start Up you must e be qualified to configure the drive and be familiar with the operation of AC drives e be familiar with the operation of the LCD OIM e have completed
173. gt Motor Data Motor NP RPM Motor Control gt Motor Data Motor NP Volts Motor Control gt Motor Data Motor OL Count Utility gt Diagnostics Motor OL Factor Motor Control gt Motor Data Motor OL Hertz Motor Control gt Motor Data B 4 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Parameter Name Motor Type Path File gt Group Motor Control gt Motor Data Mtr NP Pwr Units Motor Control gt Motor Data Output Current Monitor gt Metering Output Freq Monitor gt Metering Output Power Monitor gt Metering Output Powr Fctr Monitor gt Metering Output Voltage Monitor gt Metering Overspeed Limit Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Param Access Lvl Utility gt Drive Memory PI Configuration Speed Command gt Process PI PI Control Speed Command gt Process PI PI Error Meter Speed Command gt Process PI PI Fdback Meter Speed Command gt Process PI PI Feedback Sel Speed Command gt Process PI PI Integral Time Speed Command gt Process PI PI Lower Limit Speed Command gt Process PI PI Output Meter Speed Command gt Process PI PI Preload Speed Command gt Process PI PI Prop Gain Speed Command gt Process PI PI Ref Meter Speed Command gt Process PI PI Reference Sel Speed Command gt Process PI PI Setpoint Speed Command gt Process PI PI Status Speed Command gt Pro
174. he Autotune procedure 3 Calculate This setting uses motor nameplate data to automatically set IR Voltage Drop and Flux Current Ref When the drive is initially powered up the Autotune 61 parameter defaults to Calculate With this setting any changes made by the user to Motor NP Power 45 Motor NP Volts 41 or Motor NP Hertz 48 activates a new calculation which updates the IR Voltage Drop 62 and Flux Current 5 parameters This calculation is based on a typical motor with those nameplate values The Autotune parameter does not reset to zero after this calculation is performed Calculations will continue to be performed every time motor nameplate values are changed 62 IR Voltage Drop Range 0 0 to Motor NP Volts x 0 25 0 1 VAC Default Based on Drive Rating Access 1 Path Motor Control gt Torq Attributes See also 53 The value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator at rated motor current Used only when Torque Perf Mode 53 is set to Sensrls Vect or SV Economize This value is set by the Autotune procedure 61 63 Flux Current Ref Range 0 00 to Motor NP FLA 0 01 Amps Default Based on Drive Rating Access 1 Path Motor Control gt Torg Attributes See also 53 The value of amps for full motor flux Used only when Torque Perf Mode 53 is set to Sensrls Vect or SV Economize This value is set by the Autotune procedure 61 12 16 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 69 Start Acc Boo
175. he motor nameplate full load amps is then multiplied by the motor overload factor to allow you to re define the continuous level of current allowed by the motor thermal overload function Since the motor thermal overload function cannot distinguish individual currents in a multi motor application it is suggested that it be disabled in these cases This can be done by setting the correct bit in Fault Config 238 to zero to disable the motor thermal overload Motor Overload Hz 47 is used to allow you to adjust the response of the motor thermal overload to lower motor speeds lower output frequencies where a higher degree of protection may be required due to decreased motor cooling Parameter Descriptions 12 9 43 44 Motor NP Hertz Range 5 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 1 Hz Default Based on Drive Type Access 1 Path Motor Control gt Motor Data See also Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency The motor nameplate base frequency defines the output frequency when operating at rated voltage rated current rated speed and rated temperature Motor NP RPM Range 60 to 24000 RPM 1 RPM Default 1750 RPM Access 1 Path Motor Control gt Motor Data See also Set to the motor nameplate rated RPM The motor nameplate RPM defines the rated speed when operating at motor nameplate base frequency rated current base voltage and rated temperature This is used to calculate slip 45 lt b Motor NP Power Range 0 00
176. he reference If no control device including the terminal block is currently requesting manual control of the reference then the drive will use the normal reference selection mechanisms 19 Reserved 20 Acc2 amp Dec2 A single input function is used to select between Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 and Accel Time 2 Decel Time2 If the function is open the drive will use Accel Time 1 as the acceleration rate and Decel Time 1 as the deceleration rate If the function is closed the drive will use Accel Time 2 as the acceleration rate and Decel Time 2 as the deceleration rate 21 22 Accel 2 Decel 2 One input function called Accel 2 selects between Accel Time 1 and Accel Time 2 and another input function called Decel 2 selects between Decel Time 1 and Decel Time 2 The open state of the function selects Accel Time 1 or Decel Time 1 and the closed state selects Accel Time 2 or Decel Time 2 12 92 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 23 24 MOP Increment MOP Decrement The MOP is a reference setpoint called the MOP Value that can be incremented and decremented by external devices These inputs are used to increment and decrement the Motor Operated Potentiometer MOP value inside the drive The MOP value will be retained through a power cycle While the MOP Increment input is closed the MOP value will increase at the rate contained in MOP Rate The rate units are Hz per second While the MOP Decrement input is closed MOP valu
177. he selection of the active Speed Reference can be made through digital inputs DPI command Jog key or Auto Manual OIM operation See figure 7 3 Digital Inx Select PI Exclusive Mode Trim Speed Sel 3 2 1 PI Configuration r Pure Reference Auto Speed Ref Options Bit 0 Excl Mode 0 rx Dive Ref Rst 27 gt to follower drive for Speed Ref A Sel Parameter 090 Frequency Reference Preset Speed 1 Parameter 101 Preset Speed 2 Parameter 102 Preset Speed 3 Parameter 103 Preset Speed 4 Parameter 104 Preset Speed 5 Parameter 105 Preset Speed 6 Parameter 106 Preset Speed 7 Parameter 107 Mod Functions Skip Clamp Direction etc U Min Max Speed elele sje Tee o oje l elslel e oje Commanded Frequency 2 Manual Speed Ref Options DPI Port Ref 1 6 See Parameter 209 DPI Command Auto Manual TB Man Ref Sel Parameter 096 Digital Input Jog Speed Parameter 100 Jog Command Acc Dec Ramp and S Curve Post Ramp Reference 273 L to follower drive for Speed Adders Speed Mode j Frequency Reference PI Output 138 I gt 2 Process Pi Slip Compensation 123 1 Slip Comp None I 0 Open Loop Output Frequency 1 Figure 7 3 Speed Reference Control Flowchart 7 5 4 Aut
178. hooting the Drive 13 3 13 3 About Alarms Alarms indicate conditions that may affect drive operation or application performance There are two alarm types as described in table 13 2 Table 13 2 Types of Alarms Type Alarm Description User Configurable These alarms alert the operator of conditions that if left untreated may lead to a fault condition The drive continues to operate during the alarm condition The alarms are enabled or disabled using Alarm Config 1 259 The status of these alarms is shown in Drive Alarm 1 211 Non Configurable These alarms alert the operator of conditions caused by improper programming and prevent the drive from starting until the problem is resolved These alarms are always enabled The status of these alarms is shown in Drive Alarm 2 212 The drive indicates alarm conditions in the following ways e Ready LED on the drive cover see table 13 1 e Alarm name and bell graphic on the LCD OIM see chapter 9 The alarm is displayed as long as the condition exists The drive automatically clears the alarm when the condition causing it is removed e Alarm status parameters Two 16 bit parameters Drive Alarm 1 211 and Drive Alarm 2 212 indicate the status of type 1 and type 2 alarms respectively Refer to chapter 12 for the parameter descriptions 13 4 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 13 3 1 Alarm Descriptions Table 13 3 Alarm Descriptions
179. imit Hardware Current Limit Instantaneous Current Limit 20 to160 of rated current 200 of rated current typical 220 300 of rated current dependent on drive rating Line transients Up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62 41 1991 Control Logic Noise Immunity Showering arc transients up to 1500 V peak Power Ride Thru 15 milliseconds at full load Logic Control Ride Thru 0 5 seconds minimum 2 seconds typical Ground Fault Trip Phase to ground on drive output Short Circuit Trip Phase to phase on drive output Technical Specifications A 1 Table A 2 Agency Certification Certification Listed to UL508C and CAN CSA C2 2 No 14 M91 Listed to UL508C for plenums Rear heatsink only Marked for all applicable European Directives EMC Directive 89 336 EEC EN 61800 3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations Certified to AS NZS 1997 Group 1 Class A N223 NSF Certified to Criteria C 2 1983 The drive is also designed to meet the appropriate portions of the following specifications NFPA 70 US National Electrical Code NEMA ICS 3 1 Safety standards for Construction and Guide for Selection Installation and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems IEC 146 International Electrical Code Applied noise impulses may be counted in additio
180. ing ZA z a gt Device Version Accum V OIM Version VV hours min sec Diagnostics Monitor Lan l 2 TAIS Highlight item lt gt Highlight Diagnostics icon Figure 13 4 Accessing the Fault Queue pign BFHxxxxx Fault1 Text String Accum hours min sec OOM F3 Drive reset F2 Clear fault queue F1 Clear fault Fitas HF xxxxx Fault2 Text String Accum hours min sec or ow om Appears only when fault is active Figure 13 5 Sample Fault Queue Entry 13 8 2 Accessing the Fault Parameters The LCD OIM provides quick access to the drive s fault parameters by grouping them in the Fault Info submenu To access these parameters see figure 13 6 gt gt Stopped Auto a PO SP600 Main Menu e Diagnostics Diag Fault Info ae M Sisusteraut p Nee Status1 Fault Ar E wt OIM Version L Status2 Fault Alarm Fault Diagnostics Monitor Lang AIS Highlight item AIS Highlight parameter lt gt Highlight Diagnostics icon Select Figure 13 6 Accessing the Fault Parameters 13 24 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 13 8 3 Accessing the Drive Status Parameters The LCD OIM provides quick access to the drive status parameters by grouping them in the Status Info submenu To access these parameters see figure 13 7
181. ing motor The motor will then accelerate to the desired frequency 170 Flying StartGain Range 20 to 32767 1 Default 4000 Access 2 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes Seealso 169 Adjusts the responsiveness of the flying start function Increasing the value in this parameter increases the responsiveness of the flying start function Parameter Descriptions 12 49 174 Auto Rstrt Tries Range Oto9 1 Default 0 Disabled Access 1 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes See also 175 ATTENTION Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if parameter 174 is used in an inappropriate application Do not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines ATTENTION The drive may start immediately after a fault is auto reset when LevelSense Start 168 is set to Enabled When LevelSense Start is enabled the user must ensure that automatic start up of the driven equipment will not cause injury to operating personnel or damage to the driven equipment In addition the user is responsible for providing suitable audible or visual alarms or other devices to indicate that this function is enabled and the drive may start at any moment Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life Important The drive will re start after a reset if the start input is still asserted
182. inks Data Out B2 Link B Word 2 Communication gt Datalinks Data Out C1 Link C Word 1 Communication gt Datalinks Data Out C2 Link C Word 2 Communication gt Datalinks Data Out D1 Link D Word 1 Communication gt Datalinks Data Out D2 Link D Word 2 Communication gt Datalinks DB Resistor Type Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes DC Brake Level Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes DC Brake Lvl Sel Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes DC Brake Time Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes DC Bus Memory Monitor gt Metering DC Bus Voltage Monitor gt Metering Decel Time 1 Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates Decel Time 2 Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates B 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Parameter Name Dig In Status Path File gt Group Utility gt Diagnostics Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs Dig Out Status Utility gt Diagnostics Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs Dig Out1 Level Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs Dig Out1 OffTime Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs Dig Out1 OnTime Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs Dig Out2 Level Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs Dig Out2 OffTime Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs Dig Out2 OnTime Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs Digital In1 Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs Digital In2
183. ion Important SP600 AC drives rated for 575 VAC input do not comply with CE standards 2 18 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 2 5 1 Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations EMC Directive 89 336 EEC S EN61800 3 Second Environment Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods General Notes To be CE compliant the motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents AC drives may cause radio interference The user is required to take measures to prevent interference in addition to the essential requirements for CE compliance listed in section 2 6 1 if necessary If the adhesive label is removed from the top of the drive the drive must be mounted in a cabinet with side openings less than 12 5 mm 0 5 in and top openings less than 1 0 mm 0 04 in to maintain compliance with the Low Voltage Directive Conformity with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee that the entire machine or installation will comply with the requirements Many factors can influence total machine installation compliance Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended SP600 drives can generate conducted low frequency disturbances harmonic emissions on the AC supply system Essential Requirements for CE Compliance All conditions listed below mu
184. ion time Drive 64 Drive rating of 110 for Reduce load or extend OverLoad 1 minute or 150 for 3 Accel Time 140 seconds has been exceeded Excessive 79 Motor did not come up 1 Uncouple load from Load to speed in the allotted motor time 2 Repeat Autotune 61 FluxAmpsRef 78 The value for flux amps 1 Reprogram Motor NP Rang determined by the FLA 42 with the autotune procedure correct motor exceeds the nameplate value programmed Motor NP FLA 42 2 Repeat Autotune 61 Function Loss 2 Function loss inputis Check remote wiring open Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth Check the motor and ground greater than external wiring to the drive 25 of drive rating output terminals for a grounded condition Heatsink 8 Heatsink temperature 1 Check for blocked or OvrTemp exceeds a predefined dirty heat sink fins value of 90 C 195 F Verify that ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 C 104 F NEMA Type 1 installations or 50 C 122 F for Open type installations Check fan 13 12 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table 13 6 Fault Descriptions and Corrective Actions Continued o Fault 3 5 Description Action HW 12 The drive output current Check programming OverCurrent has exceeded the Check for excess load hardware current limit improper DC boost setting DC brake volts set too high or other causes of excess current Motor dynamics ca
185. ip for stop speed feedback and remote control signals Wiring of the terminal block is detailed in table 7 1 Stop Circuit Requirements ATTENTION You must provide an external hardwired emergency stop circuit outside of the drive circuitry This circuit must disable the system in case of improper operation Uncontrolled machine operation can result if this procedure is not followed Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Depending upon the requirements of the application the SP600 AC drive can be configured to provide either a coast to rest or a ramp to rest operational stop without physical separation of the power source from the motor A coast to rest stop turns off the transistor power device drivers A ramp to rest stop fires the transistor power device drivers until the motor comes to a stop and then turns off the power devices In addition to the operational stop you must provide a hardwired emergency stop external to the drive The emergency stop circuit must contain only hardwired electromechanical components Operation of the emergency stop must not depend on electronic logic hardware or software or on the communication of commands over an electronic network or link Note that the hardwired emergency stop you install can be used at any time to stop the drive Installing Control Wiring 7 1 7 1 1 User Initiated Stopping ATTENTION Note the following about stop commands
186. iring must be routed in separate conduits to prevent interference with drive operation Note that no wires are to be routed behind the drive Use grommets when hubs are not provided to guard against wire chafing Figure 5 1 shows the wire routing grounding terminal and power terminal blocks of the SP600 AC drives ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drive motor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads If additional wiring access is needed the Cable Entry Plate item in figure 5 1 on all drive frames can be removed Simply loosen the screws securing the plate to the heat sink and slide the plate out Finding Wire Routing Locations and Grounding the Drive 5 1 ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from
187. is impedance could come from the supply transformer itself the cable between the transformer and drive or an additional transformer or reactor Making Sure Environmental Conditions are Met Before deciding on an installation site consider the following guidelines Verify that NEMA 1 drives can be kept clean cool and dry The area chosen should allow the space required for proper air flow as defined in section 3 1 3 Be sure that NEMA 1 drives are away from oil coolants or other airborne contaminants S Do not install the drive more than 3300 feet above sea level without derating output power For every 300 feet above 3300 feet derate the output current 1 e Verify that the drive location will meet the temperature and environmental requirements in table A 3 in Appendix A Mounting the Drive 3 5 3 1 3 Minimum Mounting Clearances Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive SP600 NEMA 1 drives are rated at 50 C NEMA 4 drives are rated 40 C and can be mounted with minimum side clearance For best air movement do not mount SP600 AC drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring See figure 3 3 for recommended air flow clearances Clearances apply to all SP600 Drives Panel Mount Flange Mount NEMA 4x NEMA 12
188. isabled Access 2 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs See also 91 92 190 Selects drive action when an analog signal loss is detected 1 6 V signal loss 1 9 V end of signal loss 3 2 mA signal loss 3 8 mA end of signal loss One of the selections 1 Fault stops the drive on signal loss All other choices make it possible for the input signal to return to a usable level while the drive is still running ATTENTION Setting parameter 327 to a value other than 1 allows the input signal to return to a usable level while the drive is running If a lost analog signal is restored while the drive is running the drive will ramp to the restored reference level at the rate specified in Accel Time 1 140 Accel Time 2 141 Decel Time 1 142 and Decel Time 2 143 Be aware that an abrupt speed change may occur depending upon the new reference level and the rate specified in these parameters Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Important Note that there is no signal loss detection while the input is in bipolar voltage mode see parameter 190 340 Anlg Out Config Param 340 is not available in the 6SP series Itis available in the 6SB extended HP SP600 Drive See instruction manual D2 3501 for more information 12 84 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 341 Anlg Out Absolut Range See figure 12 52 Default See figure 12 52 Access 2 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Outputs
189. ition False R Nibble4 Nibble3 Nibble2 Nibble1 Reserved Bit Figure 12 39 Alarm 1 Fault 229 230 Alarm 2 Fault Range See figure12 40 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 211 224 230 Captures and displays the Drive Alarm 2 bit pattern at the time of last fault See section 13 3 for the bit descriptions OLS amp ILS ROSES EVS SAIS REEE 0 0 0 x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Condition True 15 14 13 12 1110 9 87 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 O Condition False R Nibble4 Nibble3 Nibble2 Nibble1 Reserved Bit Figure 12 40 Alarm 2 Fault 230 Parameter Descriptions 12 69 234 Testpoint 1 Sel Range 0 to 65535 1 Default 499 Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 235 Selects the function whose value is displayed in Testpoint 1 Data 235 These are internal values that are not accessible through parameters Note This is a factory diagnostic function 235 Testpoint 1 Data Range 0 to 4 294 697 295 1 Default 0 Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 234 The present value of the function selected in Testpoint 1 Sel 234 Note This is a factory diagnostic function 236 Testpoint 2 Sel Range 0 to 65535 1 Default 499 Access 2 Path Utility gt Diagnostics See also 237 Selects the function whose value is displayed in Testpoint 2 Data 237 These ar
190. its Skip Frequency 3 Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Skip Freq Band Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits Logic Source Sel Speed Command gt Control Src Select Speed Ref A Sel Speed Command gt Control Src Select Speed Command gt Speed References Speed Ref A Hi Speed Command gt Speed References Speed Ref A Lo Speed Command gt Speed References TB Man Ref Sel Speed Command gt Speed References TB Man Ref Hi Speed Command gt Speed References TB Man Ref Lo Speed Command gt Speed References Jog Speed Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Preset Speed 1 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Preset Speed 2 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Preset Speed 3 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Preset Speed 4 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Preset Speed 5 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Preset Speed 6 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Preset Speed 7 Speed Command gt Discrete Speeds Trim In Select Speed Commands gt Speed Trim Trim Out Select Speed Command gt Speed Trim Trim Hi Speed Command gt Speed Trim Trim Lo Speed Command gt Speed Trim Slip RPM FLA Speed Command gt Slip Comp SP600 AC Drive User Manual Parameter Name Slip Comp Gain Path File gt Group Speed Command gt Slip Comp Setting Slip RPM Meter Speed Command gt Slip Comp PI Configur
191. ity gt Faults Fault Clear Mode Utility gt Faults Alarm Config 1 Utility gt Alarms Manual Mask Communication gt Masks amp Owners E 4 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Data In A1 Parameter Name Link A Word 1 Path File gt Group Communication gt Datali Setting Data In A2 Link A Word 2 Communication gt Datali Data In B1 Link B Word 1 Communication gt Datali Data In B2 Link B Word 2 Communication gt Datali Data In C1 Link C Word 1 Communication gt Datali Data In C2 Link C Word 2 Communication gt Datali Data In D1 Link D Word 1 Communication gt Datali Data In D2 Link D Word 2 Communication gt Datali Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 Communication gt Datali Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 Communication gt Datali Data Out B1 Link B Word 1 Communication gt Datali Data Out B2 Link B Word 2 Communication gt Datali Data Out C1 Link C Word 1 Communication gt Datali Data Out C2 Link C Word 2 Communication gt Datali Data Out D1 Link D Word 1 Communication gt Datali Data Out D2 Link D Word 2 Communication gt Datali Anlg In Config Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Anlg In Sqr Root Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Analog In 1 Hi Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Analog In 1 Lo Inputs amp Outp
192. ive Actions Continued Fault Description Action SW OverCurrent The drive output current has exceeded the software current Check for excess load improper DC boost setting DC brake volts set too high Output transistors have exceeded their maximum operating temperature 1 Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins Verify that ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 C 104 F for NEMA Type 1 installations or 50 C 122 F for Open type installations 2 Check fan UnderVoltage DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 375V DC at 575V input 300V DC at 400 480V input or 160V DC at 200 240V input Enable disable with Fault Config 1 233 Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption UserSet1 Chksum UserSet2 Chksum UserSet3 Chksum The checksum read from the user set does not match the checksum calculated Re save user set 13 16 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table 13 7 Fault Names Cross Referenced by Fault Number No Fault Function Loss 38 Phase U to Grnd 79 Excessive Load Power Loss 39 Phase V to Grnd 80 AutoTune Aborted UnderVoltage 40 Phase W to Grnd 81 86 Port 1 6 DPI Loss OverVoltage 41 Phase UV Short 100 Parameter Chksum Motor Overload 42 Phase VW Short 101 UserSet1 Chksum Heatsink OvrTemp 43 Phase UW
193. kwellautomation com Corporate Headquarters Rockwell Automation 777 East Wisconsin Avenue Suite 1400 Milwaukee WI 53202 5302 USA Tel 1 414 212 5200 Fax 1 414 212 5201 Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products Americas Rockwell Automation 6040 Ponders Court Greenville SC 29615 4617 USA Tel 1 864 297 4800 Fax 1 864 281 2433 Europe Rockwell Automation BrihlstraRe 22 D 74834 Elztal Dallau Germany Tel 49 6261 9410 Fax 49 6261 1774 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 55 Newton Road 11 01 02 Revenue House Singapore 307987 Tel 65 351 6723 Fax 65 355 1733 Reliance Electric Standard Drives Business P O Box 248019 Mayfield Heights OH 44124 8019 USA Tel 1 888 374 8370 Fax 440 646 7317 Publication D2 3485 5 December 2004 2004 Rockwell Automation All rights reserved Printed in USA
194. l PI Preload PI Status Reset To Defalts Load Frm Usr Set PI Ref Meter Save To User Set PI Fdback Meter Reset Meters PI Error Meter PI Output Meter Accel Time 1 Language Drive Checksum Accel Time 2 Dyn UserSet Cnfg Decel Time 1 DynUsrSetSel Decel Time 2 Dyn UserSet Actv S Curve Current Lmt Sel Drive Status 1 Drive Status 2 Current Lmt Val Drive Alarm 1 Current Lmt Gain Drive Alarm 2 Drive OL Mode Speed Ref Source CarrierFrequency Stop Mode A Start Inhibits Last Stop Source Stop Mode B Dig In Status DC Brake Lvl Sel Dig Out Status DC Brake Level Drive Temp DC Brake Time Drive OL Count Bus Reg Gain Bus Reg Mode A Motor OL Count Fault Frequency Bus Reg Mode B Fault Amps DB Resistor Type LevelSense Start Fault Bus Volts Status 1 Fault Flying Start En Status 2 Fault Flying StartGain Alarm 1 Fault Auto Rstrt Tries 184 Auto Rstrt Delay Power Loss Mode Alarm 2 Fault Testpoint 1 Sel Testpoint 1 Data 185 Power Loss Time MINI PET AH NINI N N OPO HK MO CO PY CO P CO P COTM DW MW MH MW PO PY PS PS NIN Testpoint 2 Sel Parameter Descriptions 12 3 Table 12 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Name Parameter Name Testpoint 2 Data
195. l Replacement screws must be stainless steel and of the same length Tighten the screws to the specifications shown on the underside of the cover Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment Use the following steps to replace the drive cover on NEMA 4x 12 drives Step 1 Place the cover straight on the drive to avoid damaging the connector pins Step 2 Working in a diagonal pattern around the drive tighten the cover screws until resistance is met Repeat this procedure to ensure the screws are securely tightened Refer to the arrows in figure 6 2 for the tightening pattern The recommended tightening torque is 7 0 0 79 N m Step 3 Replace any additional locks Refer to section 6 1 2 1 Locking the Cover Important Use the plugs supplied with IP66 NEMA 4X 12 rated drives to seal unused holes in the conduit entry plate Completely seat the plug inner rim for the best seal See figure 6 3 Installing Power Wiring 6 3 Figure 6 3 Installing Plugs in Unused Holes in Conduit Entry Plate on NEMA 4X 12 Drives 6 1 2 1 Locking the Cover The NEMA 4x 12 SP600 drive provides two sets of slots for use with user supplied locks Refer to figure 6 4 ol j o L g 0000 Figure 6 4 Location of Slots for User Supplied Locks on NEMA 4x 12 Drives 6 4 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 6 2 Installing
196. l block enable input The terminal block stop input is open and control source is set to All Ports Close terminal block stop input Start inhibit bits are set Check status in Start Inhibits 214 Drive Status 1 209 indicates logic control source Table 13 11 Drive Indication Logic Source Sel 89 is not equal to the desired OIM Local OIM DPI Port 2 or DPI Port 3 Verify setting of Logic Source Sel 89 The OIM Control digital input effectively sets the control source to the lowest attached OIM port Does Not Respond to Changes in Speed Command Cause s Corrective Action LCD OIM Status Line indicates At Speed and output is 0 Hz No value is coming from the source of the command If the source is an analog input check wiring and use a meter to check for presence of signal Check Commanded Freq 2 for correct source Incorrect reference source has been programmed Check Speed Ref Source 213 for the source of the speed reference Reprogram Speed Ref A Sel 90 for correct source Incorrect reference source is being selected via remote device or digital inputs Check Drive Status 1 209 bits 12 15 for unexpected source selections Check Dig In Status 216 to see if inputs are selecting an alternate source Reprogram digital inputs to correct Speed Sel x option 13 20 SP600 AC Drive User Ma
197. l is defined in Dig Out x Level 381 385 Selects the drive status that will energize an output relay 1 Fault A fault has occurred and stopped the drive 2 Alarm A Type 1 or Type 2 alarm condition exists 3 Ready The drive is powered Enabled and no start inhibits exist It is ready to run 4 Run The drive is outputting voltage and frequency to the motor indicates 3 wire control either direction 5 Forward Run The drive is outputting voltage and frequency to the motor indicates 2 wire control in forward 12 98 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 6 Reverse Run The drive is outputting voltage and frequency to the motor indicates 2 wire control in reverse 7 Auto Restart The drive is currently executing the Auto Restart or Run at Power Up function 8 Reserved 9 At Speed The output frequency equals or exceeds the commanded speed 10 At Freq The drive output frequency equals or exceeds the programmed limit Also see Dig Out2 Level 385 Dig Out2 OnTime 386 and Dig Out2 OffTime 387 11 At Current The drive total output current exceeds the programmed limit 12 At Torque The drive output torque current component exceeds the programmed limit 13 At Temp The drive operating temperature exceeds the programmed limit 14 At Bus Volts The drive bus voltage exceeds the programmed limit 15 At PI Error The drive Process PI Loop error exceeds the programm
198. l ramp to the restored reference level at the rate specified in Accel Time 1 140 Accel Time 2 141 Decel Time 1 142 and Decel Time 2 143 Be aware that an abrupt speed change may occur depending upon the new reference level and the rate specified in these parameters Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Important Note that there is no signal loss detection while the input is in bipolar voltage mode see parameter 190 12 82 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 325 Analog In 2 Hi Range Default Access See also 4 000 to 20 000 mA 0 001 mA 10 0V 0 1 V 0 0 to 10 0 V 0 1 V 10 V 2 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs 91 92 Sets the highest input value to the analog input 2 scaling block See an example of Analog Input 1 scaling in parameter 322 326 Analog in 2 Lo Range Default Access See also 4 000 to 20 000 mA 0 001 mA 10 0V 0 1 V 0 010 10 0 V 0 1 V 0 000 V 2 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs 91 92 Sets the lowest input value to the analog input 2 scaling block Parameter Descriptions 12 83 327 Analog In 2 Loss Range 0 Disabled 1 Fault 2 Hold Input use last frequency command 3 Set Input Lo use Minimum Speed as frequency command 4 Set Input Hi use Maximum Speed as frequency command 5 Go to Preset1 use Preset1 as frequency command 6 Hold OutFreq maintain last output frequency Default 0 D
199. l source While the stop is asserted the drive ready status will be off A closed input will allow the drive to start An open to closed transition is interpreted as a clear faults request The drive will clear any existing faults If Start is configured then Stop Clear Faults must also be configured to prevent a digital input configuration alarm condition Stop Clear Faults is optional in all other circumstances 5 Start An open to closed transition generates a run command if the terminal block is the control source If Start is configured then Stop Clear Faults must also be configured to prevent a digital input configuration alarm condition 6 Fwd Reverse Forward Reverse An open input sets the direction to forward if the terminal block is the control source A closed input sets the direction to reverse If the state of the input changes and the drive is running or jogging the drive will change direction If the Fwd Rev input function is assigned to more than one physical digital input at a time a digital input configuration alarm will be asserted 7 Run An open to closed transition on this input generates aa run command if the terminal block is the control source If the input is open the drive will stop The purpose of this input function is to allow a 2 wire start while the direction is being controlled by some other function 8 and 9 Run Forward and Run Reverse If the terminal block is the control source an op
200. l the fuses or circuit breakers recommended in tables 4 5 through 4 7 Do not exceed the fuse or circuit breaker ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in a dangerous condition and or damage to equipment Input line branch circuit protection fuses or circuit breakers must be used to protect the input power lines Tables 4 5 4 6 and 4 7 provide recommended AC line input fuse and circuit breaker information Both types of short circuit protection are acceptable for UL and IEC requirements The input fuse or circuit breaker ratings listed in the tables are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that circuit Sizes listed are the recommended sizes based on 40 C and the U S N E C Other country state or local codes may require different ratings Fusing If fuses are chosen as the desired protection method refer to the recommended types listed below If available amp ratings do not match the tables provided the closest fuse rating that exceeds the drive rating should be chosen IEC BS88 British Standard Parts 1 amp 21 EN60269 1 Parts 1 amp 2 type gG or equivalent should be used SUL UL Class CC T or J must be used Circuit Breakers The circuit breakers listed in tables 4 5 through 4 7 are for inverse time circuit breakers 1 Typical designations include but may not be limited to the following Parts 1 amp 2 AC AD BC BD CD DD ED EFS EF FF FG
201. lal Set Acc Lvl PW Password Set Wrt Prot PW Monitor lt gt Highlight Password icon A Y Highlight option A Y Increase decrease value lt gt Move placeholder Accept value Figure 11 6 Setting the Write Protect Password When you enter the password you can adjust parameters until you select Logout or return to the process display screen which re activates the password Refer to section 9 8 in chapter 9 for information about the process display screen This option is not supported in the VS Utilities software Programming Basics 11 7 If There is More Than One OIM Connected to the Drive Important Setting the write protect password value to zero on one OIM will disable the write protect password on all connected OIMs Setting the write protect password in one OIM will not affect any other OIM connected to the drive unless a write protect password has also been set in the other OIMs In this case the last password value entered becomes the password value for all password protected OIMs Each OIM cannot have a different password value For example if the write protect password has been set to 5555 for the local OIM someone using a remote OIM with no write protect password set can still program all of the parameters If the write protect password is then set to 1111 on the remote OIM you will be required to enter 1111 on the local OIM to program the param
202. le bus voltage and the time between pulses the carrier frequency modulation technique and duty cycle Figure 4 3 shows the per unit motor overvoltage as a function of cable length This is for no correction versus the modulation correction code for varied lengths of 12 AWG PVC cable to 600 feet for a 4 kHz and 8 kHz carrier frequencies The output line to line voltage was measured at the motor terminals in 100 feet increments Without the correction the overvoltage increases to unsafe levels with increasing cable length for both carrier frequencies The patented modulation correction code reduces the overvoltage for both carrier frequencies and maintains a relatively flat overvoltage level for increasing cable lengths beyond 300 feet No Correction vs Correction Method at 4 kHz and 8 kHz Carrier Frequencies Vbus 650 fe 60 Hz 2 No Correction 4 kHz Carrier 2 5 Corrected 4 kHz Carrier 9 4 No Correction 8 kHz Carrier Corrected 8 kHz Carrier 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 LC 2 gt 2 o gt E gt Ra Q a 200 300 400 500 600 Cable Length Feet Figure 4 3 Motor Overvoltage as a Function of Cable Length SP600 AC Drive User Manual 4 4 Selecting Input Line Branch Circuit Protection ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Instal
203. le of recommended cable is Belden 295xx xx determines gauge This cable has four 4 XLPE insulated conductors with a 100 coverage foil and an 85 coverage copper braided shield with drain wire surrounded by a PVC jacket See table 4 1 Other types of shielded cable are available but the selection of these types may limit the allowable cable length Particularly some of the newer cables twist 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield This construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and reduce the overall drive performance Unless specified in the individual distance tables as tested with the drive these cables are not recommended and their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known 4 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table 4 1 Recommended Shielded Wire Location Rating Type Description Standard 600V 90 C 194 F e Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation Option 1 XHHW2 RHW 2 Copper braid aluminum foil combination shield and Anixter tinned copper drain wire B209500 B209507 PVC jacket Belden 29501 29507 S or equivalent Standard Tray rated 600V 90 C e Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE Option 2 194 F RHH RHW 2 insulation Anixter OLF 7xxxxx or e 5 mil single helical copper tape 25 overlap min equivalent with three bare copper grounds in contact with shield e PVC jacket Class amp Il Tray rated 600V 90
204. level 16 Analog In1 Value 17 Analog In2 Value Range 4 000 to 20 000 mA 0 001 mA 10 0V 0 1 V Default Read Only Access 1 Path Monitor gt Metering See also 320 Displays the value of the signal at the analog inputs This value does not include user programmed scaling information for example Analog In1 Hi The value displayed depends on the setting of Analog In Config 320 If Parameter 320 If Parameter 320 Value of xx00 XX11 Analog In1 volts terminals 14 15 mA terminals 16 17 Analog In2 volts terminals 18 19 mA terminals 20 21 Parameter Descriptions 12 7 26 Rated kW Range 0 37 to 15 0 kW 0 1 kW Default Read Only Access 0 Path Monitor gt Drive Data See also Displays the drive power rating in kilowatts 27 Rated Volts Range 208 to 600 V 0 1 VAC Default Read Only Access 0 Path Monitor gt Drive Data See also 202 Displays the drive input voltage class 208 240 400 etc This value will reflect the option selected in parameter 202 Voltage Class and correspond to the connected input voltage 28 Rated Amps Range 1 1 to 32 2 Amps 0 1 Amps Default Read Only Access 0 Path Monitor gt Drive Data See also Displays the drive rated output current This value corresponds to the drive nameplate continuous output 29 Control SW Ver Range 0 000 to 65 256 0 001 Default Read Only Access 0 Path Monitor gt Drive Data See also 196 Displ
205. load also includes an inverse time algorithm When this scheme detects operation beyond rated levels current limit may be reduced or a fault may be generated About the Drive 2 11 2 4 14 Motor Overload Protection The motor thermal overload function enabled in parameter 238 uses an inverse time IT algorithm to model the temperature of the motor This curve is modeled after a Class 10 protection thermal overload relay that produces a theoretical trip at 600 motor current in 10 seconds and continuously operates at full motor current The following parameters are used to set the overload feature e Motor NP LFA 42 e OL Factor 48 Motor OL Hertz 47 Fault Config 1 238 Refer to parameter 42 in chapter 12 for more information about this feature 2 4 15 Shear Pin Fault This feature allows you to program the drive to fault if the drive output current exceeds the programmed current limit see parameter 238 As a default exceeding the set current limit is not a fault condition However if you want to stop the process in the event of excess current the Shear Pin feature can be activated By programming the drive current limit value and enabling the electronic shear pin the drive will fault if excess current is demanded by the motor 2 4 16 Drive Peripheral Interface DPI SP600 drives support Drive Peripheral Interface DPI communication protocols for the primary interface and drive control DPI is an enhanced s
206. lt Read Only Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Process PI See also 124 138 Displays the present value of the process PI reference signal 12 36 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 136 PI Fdback Meter Range 100 00 0 01 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Process PI See also 124 138 Displays the present value of the process PI feedback signal 137 PI Error Meter Range 100 00 0 01 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Process PI See also 124 138 Displays the present value of the process PI error signal 138 PI Output Meter Range 100 0 Hz 0 1 Hz Default Read Only Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Process PI See also 124 138 Displays the present value of the process PI output signal PI Output PI Error x PI Prop Gain PI Error PI Integral Gain 140 Accel Time 1 141 Accel Time 2 Range 0 1 to 3600 0 Sec 0 1 Sec Default 10 0 Sec Access 140 0 Path Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates 141 2 See also 142 143 146 361 366 The Accel Time parameters set the rate at which the drive ramps to its output frequency after a start command or during an increase in command frequency speed change The rate established is the result of the following equation Maximum Frequency Minimum Frequency Accel Time Accel Rate Two accel times exist to enable acceleration rate changes on the fly using a network command digital input or F Key on the L
207. lting in possible device damage 12 46 SP600 AC Drive User Manual a Three Phase i AC Input AC Drive Input Contactor M Power Off Power On i 6 Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat Figure 12 24 Protective Circuit for External Resistor Packages Parameter Descriptions 12 47 168 LevelSense Start Range 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default 0 Disabled Access 2 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes See also 160 163 ATTENTION Be aware of the following e Setting parameter 168 to 1 Enabled immediately applies output power to the motor when all start conditions are met If the drive is running from the terminal block LevelSense Start is enabled and a fault occurs the drive coasts to rest and generates a fault In this case resetting and clearing the fault immediately restarts the drive without any change to the start or stop input states When this function is enabled the user must ensure that automatic start up of the driven equipment will not cause injury to operating personnel or damage to the driven equipment In addition the user is responsible for providing suitable audible or visual alarms or other devices to indicate that this function is enabled and the drive may start at any moment Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life Enables disables a feature to issue a start or run comman
208. m which to retrieve data See figure 9 8 User Set 1 MEMORY User Set 2 User Set 3 Figure 9 8 Load From User Set This function can be assigned to a function key on the OIM Refer to section 9 8 3 Refer to section 2 4 19 to learn more about user sets and the ability to recall user sets automatically using digital inputs or a selection parameter Identifying the Active User Set To identify which user set is active select Active User Set from the Memory Storage menu The name of the last user set to be loaded into the drive will be displayed Active Set means factory defaults have been restored You can also view the active user set when in the dynamic mode by reading the value of parameter 206 not used when dynamic user sets parameter is disabled Monitoring the Drive Using the Process Display Screen on the LCD OIM The process display screen enables you to monitor up to three process variables You can select the display parameter scale and text for each process variable being displayed The key toggles between the programming screen and the process display screen From the Main Menu screen press F1 or F2 to select the process display screen In addition the process display screen becomes active if no keys have been pressed before the display timeout period expires See section 9 8 4 for information 9 10 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 9 8 1 about setting the displ
209. manent magnet motors Motors may be demagnetized during braking Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment Parameter Descriptions 12 43 159 DC Brake Time Range 0 0 to 90 0 Sec 0 1 Sec Default 0 0 Sec Access 1 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes See also 155 158 Sets the amount of time DC brake current is injected into the motor 160 Bus Reg Gain Range Oto 5000 1 Default 450 Access 2 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes See also 161 162 Sets the responsiveness of the bus regulator Adjust the value to improve performance of the bus regulator to prevent nuisance overvoltage bus faults 12 44 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 161 Bus Reg Mode A 162 Bus Reg Mode B Range 0 Disabled Co 1 Adjust Freq 2 Dynamic Brak 3 Both DB 1st 4 Both Frq 1st Default Mode A 0 Disabled Mode B 0 Disabled Access 2 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes See also 160 163 361 366 ATTENTION The Adjust Freq portion of the bus regulator function is extremely useful for preventing nuisance overvoltage faults resulting from aggressive decelerations overhauling loads and eccentric loads It forces the output frequency to be greater than commanded frequency while the drive s bus voltage is increasing towards levels that would otherwise cause a fault However it can also cause either of the following two conditions to occur
210. maximum Maximum allowable by US NEC Exact size must be chosen for each installation 4 10 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table 4 6 SP600 400 480 VAC Input Recommended Protection Devices Dual Element mA Time Delay Non time Circuit Fuse Delay Fuse Breaker Max 00 VAC Input 6SP401 1P1 3 3 15 6SP401 2P1 4 6 15 6SP401 3P4 3 6 6 15 6SP401 005 10 10 20 6SP401 008 15 30 6SP401 011 15 25 40 6SP401 014 2 20 30 60 6SP401 022 30 45 80 6SP401 027 40 60 120 6SP401 034 45 80 125 6SP401 040 60 90 150 6SP401 052 80 125 240 6SP401 065 90 150 280 Dual Element Pavers Time Delay Circuit Model Fuse Breaker Number Min Max i Max 80 VAC Input 6SP401 1P1 3 3 15 6SP401 2P1 6 6 15 6SP401 3P4 y 6 6 15 6SP401 005 10 10 20 6SP401 008 15 15 30 6SP401 011 15 20 40 6SP401 014 20 30 50 6SP401 022 25 45 80 6SP401 027 35 60 6SP401 034 40 70 6SP401 040 50 90 6SP401 052 60 6SP401 065 80 Circuit Breaker inverse time breaker For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown are maximum Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown are maximum Maximum allowable rating
211. maximum power the 5 HP 460V motor can produce is 3 7 HP at 44 6 Hz A 12 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Parameters Cross Referenced by Name The following table lists the complete set of SP600 parameters in alphabetical order Parameter Name Accel Time 1 Path File gt Group Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates Accel Time 2 Dynamic Control gt Ramp Rates Alarm 1 Fault Utility gt Diagnostics Alarm 2 Fault Utility gt Diagnostics Alarm Config 1 Utility gt Alarms Analog In 1 Hi Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Analog In 1 Lo Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Analog In 1 Loss Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Analog In 2 Hi Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Analog In 2 Lo Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Analog In 2 Loss Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Analog In1 Value Monitor gt Metering Analog In2 Value Monitor gt Metering Analog Out1 Hi Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Outputs Analog Oun Lo Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Outputs Analog Out Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Outputs Anlg In Config Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Anlg In Sqr Root Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Anlg Out Absolut Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Outputs Auto Rstrt Delay Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes Auto Rstrt Tries Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes
212. mm to 1 5 mm 30 AWG to 16 AWG ESD protected 6 kV contact discharge 8 kV air discharge Technical Specifications Table A 6 Control Inputs Outputs and Power Supplies Continued Analog Input 2 Differential Current Input Signal level Differential Input resistance Isolation Initial accuracy 25 C Resolution Common Mode Rejection Ratio Input processing period Terminal block size Protection 0 4 20mA 100Q 165V 0 3 10 bits 0 1 70dB up to 500HZz over temp range 5ms 0 05 mm to 1 5 mm 30 AWG to 16 AWG ESD protected 6 kV contact discharge 8 kV air discharge Analog Output Analog output voltage range Loading impedance Accuracy over temperature range Resolution Frequency of output waveform Output processing period Terminal block size Protection 0 to 10V 2kQ minimum 2 35 maximum 10 bits 0 1 160Hz maximum 5ms 0 05 mm to 1 5 mm 30 AWG to 16 AWG Short circuit proof ESD protected 6 kV contact discharge 8 kV air discharge Reference Power Supply Output Voltage Potentiometer resistance range Accuracy over temperature range Terminal block size Protection 10V 2kQ to 10kQ 2 35 maximum 0 05 mm to 1 5 mm 30 AWG to 16 AWG Short circuit proof ESD protected 6 kV contact discharge 8 kV air discharge 24V Power Supply Output Voltage Output Current Isolation Terminal block size Protection 24V to 28V 150mA maximum 25V 0
213. mper 3 4 communication options 2 23 Compensation 56 12 14 contactors using input output 4 4 control and signal wire sizes 4 5 control modes 2 8 Control SW Ver 29 12 8 control terminal block 7 2 ControlNet module 2 23 cover drive locking NEMA 4 6 4 removing and replacing NEMA 1 6 1 removing and replacing NEMA 4 6 2 Current Lmt Gain 149 12 39 Current Lmt Sel 147 12 38 Current Lmt Val 148 12 39 D Data In A1 Link A Word 1 300 12 76 Data In A2 Link A Word 2 301 12 76 Data In B1 Link B Word 1 302 12 76 Data In B2 Link B Word 2 303 12 76 Data In C1 Link C Word 1 304 12 77 Data In C2 Link C Word 2 305 12 77 Data In D1 Link D Word 1 306 12 77 Data In D2 Link D Word 2 307 12 77 Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 310 12 78 Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 311 12 78 Data Out B1 Link B Word 1 312 12 78 D T E e wa Index Index 1 Data Out B2 Link B Word 2 313 12 78 Data Out C1 Link C Word 1 314 12 78 Data Out C2 Link C Word 2 315 12 78 Data Out D1 Link D Word 1 316 12 79 Data Out D2 Link D Word 2 317 12 79 Datalinks 2 12 DB Resistor Type 163 12 46 DC Brake Level 158 12 43 DC Brake Lvl Sel 157 12 43 DC Brake Time 159 12 44 DC Bus Memory 13 12 7 DC Bus Voltage 12 12 7 DC bus voltage measuring points 13 1 13 2 Decel Time 1 142 12 38 Decel Time 2 143 12 38 derating guidelines A 8 device items how to select 13
214. n Diagnostics CL IDT Monitor Tas AIS Highlight item alg Highlight Diagnostics icon Figure 13 9 Accessing the Device Version Information Diag Product Ver Diag Dev Comp Diag Comp Ver FW Ver X XXX Main Control FW Ver x xxx Series X Ni XXX Date mm dd yyyy LPrdt Pas 4 4 4 F1 F1 F3 To Component To Product Flash F W Level Level Information Figure 13 10 Device Version Screens at Product and Component Levels 13 26 SP600 AC Drive User Manual OIM Version The OIM Version selection provides information on the OIM you are using to access this data See figures 13 11 and 13 12 Sens ue a PO SP600 Main Menu Diagnostics See OIM Version 9 fi igure 4 4 En gt Fault Info AX d E 12 11 Status Info Diagnostics Monitor alg Highlight Diagnostics icon AIS Highlight item Figure 13 11 Accessing the OIM Version Information Diag Prodct Ver Diag OIM Comp Diag Comp Ver FW Ver X XXX LCD OIM Standard FW Ver x xxx Series X 5 HW Ver xxx Date mm dd yyyy S XXXXXXXX T 4 F1 F3 To Component To Product Flash F W Level Level Information Figure 13 12 OIM Version Screens at the Product and Component Levels Device Items The Device Items selection provides access to a list of diagnostic parameters These parameters should
215. n be activated with a faster rate selected When Ramp is selected the drive acknowledges the Stop command by decreasing or ramping the output voltage and frequency to zero in a programmed period Decel Time maintaining control of the motor until the drive output reaches zero The output transistors are then shut off The load motor should follow the decel ramp Other factors such as bus regulation and current limit can alter the decel time and modify the ramp function Ramp mode can also include a timed hold brake Once the drive has reached zero output hertz on a Ramp to Stop and parameters DC Brake Time 159 and DC Brake Level 158 are not zero the drive applies DC to the motor producing current at the DC Brake Level for the DC Brake Time The drive output voltage will be zero when the hold time is finished Output Voltage r N SA X N Output Current YN SN N Ouiputvotage NX gt Hold NA Level S Time K E S stop Zero DC Hold Time Command Command Speed Figure 12 20 Ramp Stop Stop Mode A 1 Parameter Descriptions 12 41 2 Ramp to Hold When Stop Mode A 155 is set to Ramp to Hold the drive ramps the frequency to zero based on the deceleration time programmed into Decel Time 1 142 or Decel Time 2 143 Once the drive reaches zero hertz a DC injection holding current is applied to the motor based on the values set in DC Brake Level 158 and DC Brake Lvl Sel 157 The DC h
216. n be viewed on the LCD OIM using an Access Level password See section 11 3 5 for more information about this password You can also protect parameters from unauthorized changes by activating the Write Protect password See section 11 4 for more information about this password 2 4 19 User Sets 2 4 19 1Normal Mode After a drive has been configured for a given application you can store a copy of all of the parameter settings in a specific EEPROM area known as a user set Up to three user sets can be stored in the drive s memory to be used for backup batch switching or other needs All parameter information is stored You can then recall this data to the active drive operating memory as needed Each user set can also be identified with a user selected name You can use this feature using any of the following methods e Set parameters Load Frm Usr Set 198 and Save To User Set 199 Refer to the parameter descriptions in chapter 12 Program the function keys on the LCD OIM Refer to section 9 8 3 for this procedure Access the Memory Storage menu on the LCD OIM See section 9 7 2 About the Drive 2 13 P 204 Dyn UserSet Cnfg Dynamic Mode Disabled 0 NVS Memory ja Power Down or Parameter Chang Operating pote prea Power Up or Restore User Set Values p User Set 1 User Parameter Changes it User Set 2 5 a D d 5 Z 2 2 8 P 3 2 J0 Z L 199 3SN anes
217. n fwd or run rev command is considered a stop command e Issuing a fault reset command from any active source e Removing the enable input signal e Setting Auto Resirt Tries to zero e Occurrence of a fault that is not auto resettable e Removing power from the drive e Exhausting an auto reset run cycle Note that two autotuning status bits are provided in Drive Status 2 210 an active status bit and a countdown status bit 175 Auto Rstrt Delay Range 0 5 to 30 0 Sec 0 1 Sec Default 1 0 Sec Access 1 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes Seealso 174 Sets the time between restart attempts when the auto restart feature is enabled Refer to Auto Rsirt Tries 174 for more information about the auto restart feature Parameter Descriptions 12 51 184 Power Loss Mode Range 0 Coast 1 Decel Default 0 Coast Access 1 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Power Loss See also 185 Sets the reaction to a loss of input power Power loss is recognized when s DC bus voltage is lt 73 of DC Bus Memory and Power Loss Mode is set to Coast e DC bus voltage is lt 82 of DC Bus Memory and Power Loss Mode is set to Decel 0 Coast The drive coasts to stop if the bus voltage drops below the threshold level Output transistors disabled 1 Decel Provides inertia ride through which may prevent the drive from the need to reconnect to the motor By recapturing the mechanical energy converting it to elec
218. n to the standard pulse train causing erroneously high Pulse Freq readings Important SP600 AC drives rated for 575 VAC input do not comply with CE standards A 2 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table A 3 Environment Altitude 1000 m 3300 ft max without derating Ambient Operating Temperature Without Derating Open Type IP20 IP54 NEMA Type 1 and Flange Mount 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F IP66 and NEMA Type 4X 12 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Storage Temperature all const 40 to 70 C 158 F Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Relative Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Shock 15G peak for 11ms duration 1 0 ms Vibration 0 152 mm 0 006 in displacement 1G peak Important Removing the adhesive label from the drive changes the NEMA enclosure rating from Type 1 Enclosed to Open Type Technical Specifications A 3 Voltage Tolerance Table A 4 Electrical See table A 10 for Full Power and Operating Range Frequency Tolerance 47 to 63 Hz Input Phases Three phase input provides full rating for all drives Single phase operation provides 50 of rated current Displacement Power Factor 0 98 across sp
219. n volatile storage as part of initialization If Dynamic Mode is Enabled the selected User Set data will be loaded and processed after drive initialization completes but before the drive is allowed to become active If Dynamic Mode is active and drive power is removed User Set data will not be saved and any parameter changes will be lost When Dyn UserSet Cnfg 204 is set to Enabled the drive will immediately transfer the selected User Set to operating memory as determined by digital inputs or DynUsrSetSel 205 The drive will verify that the User Set digital input configuration is identical in all three sets To avoid operational conflict between User Set values all digital inputs must be set identically in each user set If the digital inputs in each user set are not set identically a Type 2 alarm is generated The condition s must be corrected before the drive can become active Load Frm Usr Set 198 and Save to User Set 199 commands are not permitted in Dynamic Mode because these operations define data transfer between the active memory and the User Sets About the Drive 2 15 Disabling Dynamic Mode will cause the drive to operate in Normal Mode and parameter values will be transferred from operating memory into the active non volatile storage area P 204 Dyn UserSet Cnfg Dynamic Mode Enabled 1 NVS Memo RAM Power Up Active Area Operating Values User Set 1 User Parameter Changes U
220. nate any grounds between the motor frame and the motor power leads Verify that all ground leads are unbroken Uncouple the motor from any driven machinery Powering Up after Installation is Complete To verify that the drive is installed correctly and is receiving the proper line voltage Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Turn the drive s input power disconnect to the On position Apply power to the drive Follow the start up procedure in chapter 10 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 9 1 Using the LCD OIM The LCD Operator Interface Module OIM is a keypad display that enables you to program monitor and control the drive Refer to section 9 3 for the display description _ E 1 NEMA 1 Ok ral NEMA 4 Refer to section 9 4 for the key descriptions Figure 9 1 SP600 LCD OIM Connections The LCD OIM can be used in the following ways Drive mounted The OIM connects directly to the drive using DPI port 1 Hand held A NEMA 4 remote mount OIM is available The maximum cable length is 32 feet using extender cables Connect the cable to either DPI port 2 or 3 Remote mounted A NEMA 4 remote mount OIM is available or a cable RECBL LCD can be used to convert the standard OIM for remote mounted use NEMA 1 drives only The maximum cable length is 32 feet using extender cables Connect the cable to either DPI port 2 or 3 See figure 2 2 in chapter 2 for the connection points on the drive Using the LCD
221. nd other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment To connect AC input power to the drive Step 1 Wire the AC input power leads by routing them according to drive type Refer to figure 5 1 Maximum power wiring sizes are listed in table 4 2 Step 2 Connect the three phase AC input power leads to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 on the power terminal block Step 3 Tighten the AC input power terminals to the proper torque as shown in table 6 1 Installing Power Wiring 6 7 L3 BRI BR2 Ti T2 T3 PE PE T DC BRK U V W O O Frames A D Power Terminal Block and DC Bus Test Points Li L2 L3 DC DC BRi BR2 T R S T U Frame E Power Terminal Block Terminal Description R L1 AC line input power S L2 AC line input power T L3 AC line input power DB Dynamic brake resistor connection DB Dynamic brake resistor connection U T1 To motor V T2 To motor W T3 To motor PE Ground PE Groun
222. ne feature enabled in parameter 61 Autotune identifies the motor flux current and stator resistance for use in Sensorless Vector Control and Economizer modes selected in parameter 53 The result of the flux current test procedure is stored in the Flux Current parameter 5 and the product of Flux Current Ref 63 and stator resistance is stored in IR Voltage Drop 62 There are three options for autotuning Static the motor shaft will not rotate during this test S Dynamic the motor shaft will rotate during this test e Calculate tuning data is selected based on the motor nameplate data entered The static test determines only stator resistance while the dynamic Autotune procedure determines both the stator resistance and motor flux current IR Voltage Drop 62 is used by the drive to provide additional voltage at all frequencies to offset the voltage drop developed across the stator resistance An accurate calculation of the IR Voltage Drop will ensure higher starting torque and better performance at low speed operation If it is not possible or desirable to run the Autotune tests there are two other methods for the drive to determine the IR Voltage Drop and Flux Current parameters One method retrieves the default parameters stored in the power EEPROM and the other method calculates them from the user entered motor nameplate data parameters If the stator resistance and flux current of the motor are known you can
223. ng Locations and Grounding the Drive 5 1 Routing Input Motor Output Ground and Control Wiring for the DNS sees ee eee eee ee eee ee eee 5 1 5 2 Grounding the Drive sss 5 3 Installing Power Wiring 6 1 Removing and Replacing the Cover sese ee eee eee 6 1 6 1 1 Removing and Replacing the Cover on NEMA 1 S T 6 1 6 1 2 Removing and Replacing the Cover on NEMA 4X 12 Drives sss sees eee 6 2 6 1 2 1 Locking the Cover sese eee 6 4 6 2 Installing Output Power Wing sss sees ee ee ee e 6 5 6 3 Installing Input Wiring eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 6 6 6 3 1 Installing an Optional Transformer and Reactor 6 6 6 3 2 Installing Branch Circuit Protection 0 00 6 7 6 3 3 Installing the Required External Separate Input DISCONMECH TT 6 7 6 3 4 Installing Power Wiring from the AC Input Line to the Drive s Power Terminals sss sees eee 6 7 6 4 Dynamic Braking ConnectionS 0 0 eee 6 9 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Installing Control Wiring 7 1 Stop Circuit Heaulrementa see eee eee eee eee eee 7 1 7 1 1 User Initiated Stopping sss eee eee eee 7 2 7 2 Wiring the Signal and Control I O sss esse eee eee 7 2 7 3 W O Wiring Examples T 7 5 7 4 Wiring Diagram Control and Motor sese eee 7 7 7 5 Speed Reference Control eee eee 7 10 7 5 1 Auto Reference Sources eee ee eee 7 10 7 5 2 Manual Reference Sources ee eee e 7 10 7 5 3 Changing Reference Sources ccceeeee 7 11 7 5 4 Auto Manual Control sese
224. ng all three of the Speed Select input functions If any of the three Reference Select input functions are not configured then the software will still follow the table but will treat the unconfigured inputs as if they are permanently open Parameter Descriptions 12 91 Table 12 8 Effect of Speed Select Input State on Selected Reference Parameter that Speed Speed Speed determines Select 3 Select 2 Select 1 reference Open Open Open Speed Ref A Sel Open Open Closed Preset Speed 1 Open Closed Open Preset Speed 2 Open Closed Closed Preset Speed 3 Closed Open Open Preset Speed 4 Closed Open Closed Preset Speed 5 Closed Closed Open Preset Speed 6 Closed Closed Closed Preset Speed 7 18 Manual The Manual function allows a single control device to assume exclusive control of the manual reference The most recent peripheral OIM or terminal block that makes a manual reference request will be given control of the manual reference setpoint If the Manual input function is closed then the drive will use one of the analog inputs defined by TB Man Ref Sel as the reference If an OIM subsequently requests manual control that is Auto Man F Key is pressed and then gives control up presses Auto Man F Key again then the Auto Manual digital input must be opened and closed again to regain control of the manual reference If this input is open then the terminal block does not request manual control of t
225. ng the Drive Cover NEMA 1 Drives ceeee 6 2 Figure 6 2 Removing the Drive Cover NEMA 4x 12 Drives Frames B4 ANC D4 SHOWN si irane aaa dards etuves eatin eee 6 3 Figure 6 3 Installing Plugs in Unused Holes in Conduit Entry Plate on NEMA 4X 12 Des sese seene 6 4 Figure 6 4 Location of Slots for User Supplied Locks on NEMA 4x 12 Driva Sisane aie decliauudistieee dit aie 6 4 Figure 6 5 Power Terminal Block esse sees eee 6 8 Figure 6 6 Power Input Terminals on the Internal RFI Filter Option 6 8 Figure 6 7 Simplified Dynamic Braking Schematic sese eee eee eee 6 9 Figure 6 8 Protective Circuit for External Resistor Packages 6 10 Contents V Figure 7 1 I O Wiring Diagram sss sese sees 7 7 Figure 7 2 Wiring Diagram Default Drive Configuration 7 9 Figure 7 3 Speed Reference Control Flowchatt ccsccccsseeeseeeeee 7 11 Figure 7 4 Speed Reference Selection sees eee eee 7 13 Figure 9 1 SP600 LCD OlM sese 9 1 Figure 9 2 Installing and Removing the Local LCD OIM NEMA 1 Only 9 2 Figure 9 3 The Display Main Menu Shown sese eee eee ee eee ee eee 9 3 Figure 9 4 LCD OIM Menu Structure sss cece ee ee teeter teers teeta 9 5 Figure 9 5 Adjusting Parameters sees eee eee 9 7 Figure 9 6 Save to User Set cesse sees eee eeee serere eers nenen nenen enne 9 8 Figure 9 7 Assigning a Custom Name to a User Set eee eee eee 9 9
226. nnot be accommodated by autotuning Manual tuning of the current loop required Diagnostic Item 51 may need to be reduced Consult technical support Incompat 106 Drive rating information Load compatible version MCB PB stored on the power files into drive board is incompatible with the Main Control board IR Volts 7 The drive autotuning Re enter motor nameplate Range default is Calculate and data the value calculated for IR Drop Volts is not in the range of acceptable values Motor 7 Internal electronic An excessive motor load Overload overload trip exists Reduce load so Enable disable with drive output current does Fault Config 1 238 not exceed the current set by Motor NP FLA 42 OverSpeed 25 Functions such as slip Remove excessive load or Limit compensation or bus overhauling conditions or regulation have attempted to add an output frequency adjustment greater than that programmed in Overspeed Limit 83 increase Overspeed Limit 83 Troubleshooting the Drive 13 13 Table 13 6 Fault Descriptions and Corrective Actions Continued Fault 3 5 Description Action OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage Monitor the AC line for exceeded maximum high line voltage or value transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option Parameter 100 The checksum read
227. nt value being used by the drive This selection is based on the active value of the rate parameters 140 143 Therefore when any of these parameters change the actual acc dec rates will dynamically change Preset Speed 1 6 Toggles the selected preset speed on and off and grants Manual reference control Returns to Auto reference when the function is toggled Auto Manual Toggles between Auto and Manual reference control Using the LCD OIM 9 13 The text above the function key will change to indicate the command that will be issued when the key is pressed ATTENTION When switching from Auto to Manual or Manual to Auto the drive will ramp to the reference level provided by the new source at the rate specified in Accel Time 1 140 Decel Time 1 142 Accel Time 2 141 or Decel Time 2 143 Be aware that an abrupt speed change may occur depending upon the new reference level and rate specified in these parameters Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury View Fault Queue Displays the Fault Queue screen see chapter 13 Press to return to the process display screen Next Reserved for future use 9 14 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 9 8 3 1 Customizing the Function Key Label Text You can customize the text for each function key label up to five characters See figure 9 13 Function List Do You Wish to Name State Text From figure Undefined Rename Function FKey Text B 9 Load U
228. nts on the terminal block for braking resistors These terminals may be labeled DC and BRK on earlier drive models Figure 6 7 Simplified Dynamic Braking Schematic Installing Power Wiring 6 9 ATTENTION AC drives do not offer protection for externally mounted braking resistors A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected External resistor packages must be self protected from overtemperature or the protective circuit shown in figure 6 8 or an equivalent must be supplied ATTENTION Equipment damage may result if a drive mounted internal resistor is installed and parameter 163 is set to 1 External Res Thermal protection for the internal resistor will be disabled resulting in possible device damage Three Phase j AG input AC Drive Input Contactor M R L1 S L2 T L3 Power Off Power On E Z M R may Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat Figure 6 8 Protective Circuit for External Resistor Packages When using the braking resistor connections parameter 163 DB Resistor Type must be set to one of the following selections e 0 Internal Refers to DB plate style resistor options kits that can be mounted directly to the heatsink chassis of the drive for example 6SP2 DB1 A e 1 External Refers to externally mounted resistors These could be panel cage or other type of mounting and are not specifically designed by Rockwell Aut
229. nual Table 13 12 Drive Does Not Operate in Manual Mode Check Manual Mask 286 and Manual Owner 298 for logic verification and disabled source Table 13 13 Motor and or Drive Will Not Accelerate to Commanded Speed Indication Acceleration time is excessive Cause s Incorrect value in Accel Time x 140 141 Corrective Action Reprogram Accel Time x 140 141 Drive is forced into current limit slowing or stopping acceleration Excess load or short acceleration time Check Drive Status 2 210 bit 10 to see if the drive is in current limit Remove excess load or reprogram Accel Time x 140 141 Speed command source or value is not as expected Improper speed command Check for the proper speed command using steps 1 through 7 in table 13 11 Programming is preventing the drive output from exceeding limiting values Incorrect programming Table 13 14 Motor Operation is Indication Cause s Motor data was incorrectly entered or autotune was not performed Check Maximum Speed 82 and Maximum Freq 55 to insure that speed is not limited by programming Unstable Corrective Action 1 Correctly enter motor nameplate data 2 Perform static or rotate autotune procedure 61 Troubleshooting the Drive 13 21 Table 13 15 Drive Will Not Reverse Motor Direction Indication Table 13 16 Stop
230. o Selects parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table Refer to figure 12 47 Parameters that can be changed only while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs Entering a parameter of this type will disable the link Refer to the appropriate communications module manual for more information about Datalinks Network gt oe SP600 Drive Figure 12 47 Data Received By the Drive From the Network 302 Data ln B1 Link B Word 1 303 Data In B2 Link B Word 2 ToD Range 0 to 387 1 Default 0 Disabled Access 2 Path Communication gt Datalinks See also Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table Refer to figure 12 47 Parameters that can be changed only while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs Entering a parameter of this type will disable the link Refer to the appropriate communications module manual for more information about Datalinks 12 76 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 304 Data In C1 Link C Word 1 305 Data In C2 Link C Word 2 Range 0 to 387 1 oJ Default 0 Disabled Access 2 Path Communication gt Datalinks See also Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table Refer to figure 12 47 Parameters that can be changed only while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs Entering a parameter of this type will disable the link R
231. o Manual Control The Auto Manual input is not part of the logic commands controlled by parameter 89 Logic Source Sel The Auto Manual input affects the speed reference source only In Auto reference mode the reference source is determined by terminal block inputs if configured or a parameter Speed Ref A Sel Only one port at a time can control own the reference source In Manual reference mode the reference source for the drive is based on the port that commanded it most recently The last source that commands Manual reference mode will determine the reference used by the drive The Auto Manual function is available through the terminal block and LCD OIM function keys If configured on the terminal block it is possible to have the digital input in the Manual position but have Manual being controlled from another port Because it is an edge sensitive signal the digital input would have to be switched to Auto and then back to Manual to re acquire Manual reference control The Jog reference will bypass the Auto Manual reference while it is asserted from the control source When the Jog reference is released the control source reverts to the source that was in effect before the Jog reference was asserted Installing Control Wiring 7 11 7 6 Remote OIM Configuration If a remote OIM is connected as the user interface for speed reference or logic control Logic Source Sel 89 and Speed Ref A Select 90 must be configur
232. old is removed only by removing the Enable input or by a valid start input Motor speed during and after the application of DC depends on the combination of these two parameter settings and the mechanical system The drive output voltage will be zero when the hold time is finished a Output Voltage Output Voltage E X a Output Current Q fi Output Curent Pas oo Motor Speed hN Pi Motor Speed Output Current t sa Zero Re issuing a Command Command Start Command Snead Figure 12 21 Ramp to Hold Stop Mode A 2 3 DC Brake When Stop Mode A 155 is set to DC Brake the drive acknowledges the Stop command by immediately stopping the output and then applying a programmable DC voltage DC Brake Level 158 to one phase of the motor Output Voltage Output Voltage Output Current Output Current Motor Speed Motor Speed Output Current Output Voltage DC Hold Level t K Time b Re issuing a Start Command sion Zero Command Command Speed Figure 12 22 DC Brake Stop Mode A 3 You can also select the amount of time the braking will be applied and the magnitude of the current used for braking with DC Brake Time 159 and DC Brake Level 158 This method of braking will generate up to 40 of rated motor torque for braking and is typically used for low inertia loads 12 42 SP600 AC Drive User Manual This DC braking voltage is removed by the following events
233. oltage class For example 460 V is typically U S rated defaults and 400 V is typically European rated defaults Maximum Frequency 55 will be affected by changing this parameter Drive Voltage Voltage Class 2 Low Voltage 3 High Voltage 203 Drive Checksum Range 0 to 65535 1 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Utility gt Drive Memory See also Provides a checksum value that indicates whether or not a change in drive programming has occurred data values only 12 58 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 204 Dyn UserSet Cnfg CoO Range See figure12 28 Default See figure 12 28 Access 2 Path Utility gt Drive Memory See also 205 206 361 366 Configures behavior of User Sets Dynamic switching between sets is permitted from either digital input states of parameter value Bit 0 Dynamic Mode Specifies User Sets operating mode 0 Disabled Disabled causes normal operation 1 Enabled Enabled selects Dynamic Mode While enabled parameters changes are not saved in active non volatile storage Bit 1 Ctrl Source Defines which source controls the selection of user sets while Dynamic Mode is enabled 0 Dig Inputs Dig Inputs refers to UserSetBitn defined by Terminal Block Input s from Digital In 1 6 Sel 361 366 1 DynUsrSetSel DynUsrSetSel 205 determines the active User Set Nibble 4 Nibble 3 Nibble 2 Nibble 1 x x xlx x x x x x x x x xlx 1
234. omation to mount directly to the SP600 AC drive 6 10 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Table 6 3 Braking Resistor Capacity SP600 Absolute Suggested Peak Resulting Minimum Resistance Power Braking Torque Resistance with 10 kW expressed in of Drive Rating Zero Tolerance During rated motor Normal Duty Tolerance SP600 On Time torque 30 38 131 1 08 293 30 38 66 2 15 287 30 38 61 2 33 155 30 38 49 2 89 132 27 43 33 4 30 107 20 90 5 91 107 20 90 5 91 79 11 20 9 46 85 9 00 10 13 68 9 00 14 18 76 61 72 1 13 305 61 72 1 85 247 61 72 3 48 232 61 72 4 33 197 61 72 5 85 146 66 95 8 11 147 66 95 7 77 104 400 amp 480 V 15 HP 39 90 12 61 115 400 amp 480 V 20 HP 27 82 12 61 84 400 amp 480 V 25 HP 24 60 18 91 101 400 amp 480 V 30 HP 29 10 18 91 84 400 amp 480 V 40 HP 18 7 29 7 111 18 7 29 7 89 106 12 1 01 274 106 12 1 88 251 106 12 3 48 232 106 12 4 24 193 72 74 120 7 39 185 72 74 82 10 81 197 72 74 82 10 81 144 43 62 48 18 47 168 43 62 48 18 47 123 Future Future Future Future Future Future Future Future Future Future Future Future Future Future Future Future Installing Power Wiring 6 11 6 12 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 7 1 Installing Control Wiring This chapter describes how to wire the signal and I O terminal str
235. ons Model Numbers and Instruction Manual Numbers sss 2 23 Table 2 8 Remote OIM Model Numbers and Instruction Manual Numbers sss eee 2 23 Table 2 9 PC Based Utility Model Number and Instruction Manual Number sss sees eee eee eee eee 2 24 Table 3 1 MOV and Common Mode Capacitor Jumpers sese 3 4 Table 3 2 SP600 B TT 3 7 Table 4 1 Recommended Shielded Wire sss 4 3 Table 4 2 Power Terminal Block Specihicaliions sees ee eee ee 4 3 Table 4 3 Recommended Signal and Control Wire sse eee eee 4 5 Table 4 4 I O Terminal Block Specifications sese eee ee eee 4 5 Table 4 5 SP600 208 240 VAC Input Recommended Protection Devices sse esse ee eee 4 10 Table 4 6 SP600 400 480 VAC Input Recommended Protection Devices sse esse eee 4 11 Table 4 7 SP600 600 VAC Input Recommended Protection Devices 4 12 Table 6 1 Terminal Tightening Toques sss sese eee eee eee eee eee 6 5 Table 6 2 AC Line Heaciora sees eee 6 6 Table 6 3 Braking Resistor Capaciy eee eee eee ee eee 6 11 Table 7 1 Wiring Signal and Control I O to the Terminal Block 7 3 Table 7 2 I O Wiring Examples eee eee eee eee ee eee 7 5 Table 7 3 Parameter Configuration for Figure 7 1 Wiring Example 7 8 Table 9 1 Key Functions isinne ninnf irinna atA ieii es 9 4 Table 9 2 How to Adjust Each Parameter Type 9 8 Table 10 1 Quickstart Parameters eee ee eee 10 3 Table 12 1
236. p up screen on the LCD OIM See figure 13 3 The screen displays s Fault number s Fault name s Time that has elapsed since fault occurred Fault Fxxxxx Fault Text String Time Since Fault XXXX XX XX ACKNOWLEDGE Press any F Key to Acknowledge the Fault Figure 13 3 Sample Fault Screen on the LCD OIM The fault screen is displayed until it is acknowledged by pressing any F key or cleared in the drive by other means 13 4 1 About the Fault Queue The drive automatically retains a history of faults that have occurred in the fault queue The fault queue is accessed using the OIM or VS Utilities software The fault queue holds the four most recent faults The last fault to occur is indicated in queue entry 1 As new faults are logged into the queue existing fault entries are shifted for example entry 1 will move to entry 2 Once the queue is full older faults are discarded from the queue as new faults occur All entries in the fault queue are retained if power is lost The Time Stamp For each entry in the fault queue the system also displays a fault code and time stamp value The time stamp value is the value of an internal drive under power timer at the time of the fault The value of this timer is copied to PowerUp Marker 242 when the drive powers up The fault queue time stamp can then be compared to the value Troubleshooting the Drive 13 9 13 4 2 in PowerUp Marker to determine wh
237. pically used when measuring the feedback for the process control regulator The square root function is scaled such that the input range is the same as the output range For example if the input is set up as a unipolar voltage input then the input and output ranges of the square root function will be 0 to 10 volts T Y x x x x x x x x 1 Enable 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 0 Disable f Nibble 4 Nibble 3 il i x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Figure 12 50 Anlg In Sqr Root 321 12 80 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 322 Analog in 1 Hi Range 4 000 to 20 000 mA 0 001 mA 10 000 VDC 0 001 V 0 000 to 10 000 V 0 001 V Default 20 000 mA Access 0 Path Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs See also 91 92 320 The drive scales the value read from the analog input and converts it to scaled units for the drive The user controls the scaling by setting parameters that associate a low and high point in the input range with a low and high point in the target range Analog In 1 Hi sets the highest input value to the analog input 1 scaling block See figure 12 51 Analog Input Scaling Example Assume e Speed Ref A Sel Analog In 1 e Ref Lo 92 10 Hz e Ref Hi 91 60 Hz e Analog In 1 Lo 323 0 0 V e Analog In 1 Hi 322 10 0 V e Analog In Config 820 xxxx xx00 A Ref Hi _ 91 60 Hz Ref Lo 92 10 Hz E 0 10 V Vin
238. ping the Drive Results in Indication Cause s Digital input is not selected for reversing control Digital input is incorrectly wired Direction Mode 190 parameter is incorrectly programmed Motor wiring is improperly phased for reverse A bipolar analog speed command input is incorrectly wired or signal is absent Cause s Corrective Action Check Digital In x Sel Choose correct input and program for reverse Check input wiring Reprogram Direction Mode 190 for analog bipolar or digital unipolar control Switch two motor leads 1 Use meter to check that an analog input voltage is present 2 Check wiring Positive voltage commands forward direction Negative voltage commands reverse direction a Decel Inhibit Fault Corrective Action Decel Inhibit fault screen LCD status line indicates Faulted The bus regulation feature is enabled and is halting deceleration due to excessive bus voltage Excess bus voltage is normally due to excessive regenerated energy or unstable AC line input voltages Internal timer has halted drive operation Reprogram bus regulation parameters 161 and 162 to eliminate any Adjust Freq selection Disable bus regulation parameters 161 and 162 andadda dynamic brake 3 Correct AC input line instability or add an isolation transformer 4 Reset drive 13 22 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 13
239. purpose of speed regulation is to allow the drive to adjust to certain operating conditions such as load change and compensate for these changes in an attempt to maintain motor shaft speed within the specified regulation percentage The Speed Mode parameter 80 selects the speed regulation method for the drive and can be set to one of three choices Open Loop No speed control is offered e Slip Comp Slip compensation is active Process PI The PI loop sets the actual speed based on process variables Refer to parameter 80 in chapter 12 for more information 2 8 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 2 4 7 2 4 8 2 4 9 Auto Manual Reference Selection You can override the selected auto reference by either toggling a function key on the OIM or asserting a digital input Digital In x Sel 361 to 366 that has been configured for Manual This provides a source for local speed reference control even if a process input signal is the primary speed reference source Refer to the parameter descriptions in chapter 12 or section 9 8 3 Customizing the Function Keys in chapter 9 for more information Seven Preset Frequency Setpoints There are seven preset frequency parameters 101 to 107 that are used to store a discrete frequency value This value can be used for a speed reference or process PI reference When used as a speed reference they are selected via the digital inputs or the DPI network reference command
240. r 3 as the area in which to store data See figure 9 6 User Set 1 MEMORY User Set 2 User Set 3 Figure 9 6 Save to User Set 9 8 SP600 AC Drive User Manual This function can be assigned to a function key on the OIM Refer to section 9 8 3 for this procedure Assigning a Custom Name to a User Set You have the option of changing the name of the user set when you save it To assign a custom name to a user set follow the procedure in figure 9 7 Do You Wish to Name User Set User Set 1 Rename User Set New Nam User Set 2 User Set 3 gt Move through name text Move through letters and v Active Dev Set v symbols Will Be Saved To VRE Toggle between upper and lower case d lt Active Dev Set Will Be Saved To Saving of Active Active Set 0 Device Set To Press ENTER d User Set 2 Is Complete LA Saving of Active Device Set to Active Set 0 Is Complete ce ee a Pipe Save To Usr Set User Set 1 New Name User Set 3 OIM displays custom user set name Figure 9 7 Assigning a Custom Name to a User Set Using the LCD OIM 9 9 9 8 Loading From a User Set When the dynamic user set configure parameter 204 is programmed to disable then to recall or load a user set select Load Frm Usr Set from the Memory Storage menu Then select user set 1 2 or 3 as the area fro
241. r Manual 1 Output Freq Range 400 0 Hz 0 1 Hz Default Read Only Access 0 Path Monitor gt Metering See also Displays the output frequency present at T1 T2 and T3 U V and W This value includes reference slip compensation and IR compensation 2 Commanded Freq Range 400 0 Hz 0 1 Hz Default Read Only Access 0 Path Monitor gt Metering See also Displays the value of the pre ramp reference frequency command 3 Output Current Range 0 0 to Drive Rated Amps x 2 0 1 Amps Default Read Only Access 0 Path Monitor gt Metering See also Displays the total output current present at T1 T2 and T3 U V and W which includes torque and flux components 4 Torque Current Range Drive Rating x 2 to 2 0 1 Amps Default Read Only Access 1 Path Monitor gt Metering See also Displays the amount of current that is in phase with the fundamental voltage component This is the torque producing component of the output current 5 Flux Current Range Drive Rating x 2 to 2 0 1 Amps Default Read Only Access 1 Path Monitor gt Metering See also Displays the amount of current that is out of phase with the fundamental voltage component This is the magnetizing component of the output current Parameter Descriptions 12 5 6 Output Voltage Range 0 0 to Drive Rated Volts 0 1 VAC Default Read Only Access 0 Path Monitor gt Metering See also Displays the output voltage pre
242. r user functions keys move cursor to the right Scroll through options increase a value or toggle a bit Scroll through options decrease a value or toggle a bit Exit a menu cancel a change to a parameter or toggle between program and process user display screens Enter a menu select an option or save changes to parameter value Change motor direction if the OIM is the control source 3 D a Y CC Jog the drive if the OIM is the control source Stop the drive Clear a fault if the OIM is the control source Start the drive if the OIM is the control source F1 though F4 Predefined or user configured functions The definition of each key is shown directly above the key on the display See item in figure 9 3 7 SSI SUBS Increase speed if drive is configured for local OIM control for example Speed Ref A Sel 18 Decrease speed if drive is configured for local OIM control for example Speed Ref A Sel 18 9 4 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 9 4 C Process User QuickStart Input Voltage Motor Data aA N E Parameters S Motor Tesis K Hel Setup Configure I O Done E gt Speed Limits By Groups o 2 E P Numbers J Kar ip Display x LCD OIM Menu Structure Refer to
243. rFK Display Monitor Clears function key returns key to undefined state Figure 9 12 Accessing the Function Key Configuration Screens Select from the list of preconfigured functions Undefined default Load User Set 1 3 Loads the specified user set into active drive memory The drive responds as if a value had been entered in Load Frm User Set 198 or Load Frm Usr Set was selected from the OIM s Memory Storage menu ATTENTION Loading a user set with LevelSense Start 168 set to Enable can result in the drive starting immediately when all start conditions are met When this function is enabled the user must ensure that automatic start up of the driven equipment will not cause injury to operating personnel or damage to the driven equipment In addition the user is responsible for providing suitable audible or visual alarms or other devices to indicate that this function is enabled and the drive may start at any moment Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life Save User Set 1 3 Saves the active configuration to drive memory The drive responds as if a value had been entered in Save to User Set 199 or Save to User Set was selected from the OIM s Memory Storage menu Acc Dec Change Toggles between the display of Acc Dec rate 1 and Acc Dec rate 2 The value the drive is configured to go to not the curre
244. rces The drive speed reference can be obtained from a number of different sources The source is determined by drive programming and the condition of the Speed Select Digital Inputs or reference select bits of a drive command word The default source for a speed reference is the selection programmed in Speed Ref A Sel parameter 90 If Speed Select digital inputs are defined on the terminal block the drive could use other parameters as the speed reference source If none of the logic inputs are configured as a speed select source the speed reference source is channeled to Speed Ref A Sel 90 Manual Reference Sources The manual reference source can be provided by the terminal block an OIM connected to the local port S remote OIM port 2 or 3 the network port The manual reference overrides any auto reference selected By configuring the LCD OIM s function keys an LCD OIM can provide a reference from preset speeds 1 7 or from DPI reference ports For a terminal block to select a manual source TB Man Ref Sel 096 one of its six digital inputs must be configured as AUTO MAN and must be closed See figure 7 4 When Manual Ref Preload 193 is set to 1 Enabled the drive automatically loads the present Auto reference value into the OIM when Manual is selected See the parameter description in chapter 12 for more information 7 10 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 7 5 3 Changing Reference Sources T
245. re reserved for future use 13 4 About Faults Faults indicate conditions within the drive that require immediate attention The drive responds to a fault by initiating a coast to stop sequence and turning off output power to the motor In addition some faults are auto resettable non resettable and or user configurable as described in table 13 5 Troubleshooting the Drive 13 7 Table 13 5 Fault Types GU 2 GC Fault Description Auto Reset Run If the drive is running when this type of fault occurs and Auto Rstrt Tries 174 is set toa value greater than 0 a user configurable timer Auto Rstrt Delay 175 begins When the timer reaches zero the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault If the condition that caused the fault is no longer present the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted Non Resettable This type of fault normally requires drive or motor repair The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared The fault will be reset on power up after repair User Configurable These faults can be enabled disabled to either annunciate or ignore a fault condition using Fault Config 1 238 13 8 SP600 AC Drive User Manual The drive indicates faults in the following ways e Ready LED on the drive cover see section 13 2 e Drive status parameters Drive Status 1 209 and Drive Status 2 210 e Entries in the fault queue see section 13 4 1 e Po
246. rocess PI loop 2 16 product version how to determine 13 26 Profibus module 2 23 program protection 11 7 programming basics 11 1 Q Quickstart parameters 10 3 R Rated Amps 28 12 8 Rated kW 26 12 8 Rated Volts 27 12 8 ratings drive 2 3 to 2 6 Ready LED 13 3 RECOMM 232 2 24 RECOMM VSU 232 2 24 record of user settings E 1 to E 6 reference sources auto 7 10 changing 7 11 manual 7 10 reflected wave compensation 4 7 Reliance contacting 1 1 remote OIM connecting to NEMA 1 drives 2 23 connecting to NEMA 4 drives 2 24 replacement parts 13 23 Reset Meters 200 12 57 Reset To Defalts 197 12 56 RS485 DF1 module 2 23 Run Boost 70 12 17 S S curve 2 16 S Curve 146 12 38 safety ground 5 3 Save MOP Ref 194 12 55 Save OIM Ref 192 12 54 Save To User Set 199 12 57 sensorless vector performance 10 5 serial converter 2 24 shear pin fault 2 12 shield termination 5 4 SHLD terminal 5 4 signal terminal block 7 2 signal wire size 4 5 site requirements 3 2 skip bands 2 16 Skip Freq Band 87 12 20 Skip Frequency 1 84 12 20 Skip Frequency 2 85 12 20 Skip Frequency 3 86 12 20 Slip Comp Gain 122 12 29 Slip RPM FLA 121 12 29 Slip RPM Meter 123 12 29 speed control methods 2 8 Speed Mode 80 12 18 Speed Ref A Hi 91 12 24 Speed Ref A Lo 92 12 25 Speed Ref A Sel 90 12 23 Speed Ref Source 213 12 64 speed reference
247. rst and then switch to the secondary method Mode B can be selected via terminal block assignment If a dynamic brake resistor is connected to the drive Bus Reg Mode A and Bus Reg Mode B must be set to option 2 3 or 4 Parameter Descriptions 12 45 7 Dig ln Dig Iin Dig In 2 Dig In 7 24V See parameters 361 366 Figure 12 23 Selecting Bus Reg Mode B 163 DB Resistor Type Range 0 Internal Res 1 External Res 2 None Default 0 Internal Res Access 1 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes See also 161 162 Selects whether the internal or an external DB resistor option will be used The internal resistor is the SP600 specific DB option that mounts internally to the drive s frame An external DB resistor is panel mounted separately from the drive If a dynamic brake resistor is connected to the drive Bus Reg Mode A amp B must be set to option 2 3 or 4 ATTENTION AC drives do not offer protection for externally mounted braking resistors A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected External resistor packages must be self protected from overtemperature or the protective circuit shown in figure 12 24 or an equivalent must be supplied ATTENTION Equipment damage may result if a drive mounted internal resistor is installed and parameter 163 is set to 1 External Res Thermal protection for the internal resistor will be disabled resu
248. rved Default 2 Analog In 2 Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Process PI See also 124 138 Selects the source of the outer control loop process PI feedback signal 129 Pl Integral Time Range 0 00 to 100 00 Sec 0 01 Sec Default 2 00 Sec Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Process PI See also 124 138 Specifies the time required for the integral component to reach 100 of PI Error Meter 137 The shorter the integral time the faster the integration will react to process errors Not functional when the PI Hold bit of PI Control 125 1 Enabled 130 PI Prop Gain Range 0 00 to 100 00 0 01 Default 1 00 Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Process PI See also 124 138 Sets the value for the proportional gain component of the PI regulator The PI Hold bit and the PI Enable bit of PI Control 125 must be equal to 1 Enabled for the PI regulator to be active PI Error x PI Prop Gain PI Output 12 34 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 131 PI Lower Limit Range 400 0 Hz Default Maximum Freq Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Process PI Seealso 124 138 Sets the lower limit of the process PI output This value must be less than the value set in PI Upper Limit 132 132 Pl Upper Limit Range 400 0 Hz 0 1 Hz Default Maximum Freq Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Process PI See also 124 138 Sets the upper limit of the process PI output This value must be greater than the value set in PI Lower Limit 131
249. s Therefore the filter must only be used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be permanenily installed and solidly grounded bonded to the building power distribution ground Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected bonded to the same building power distribution ground Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection Some local codes may require redundant ground connections The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked SP600 AC Drive User Manual Installing Power Wiring ATTENTION The user is responsible for conforming with all applicable local and national codes Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment This chapter provides instructions on output wiring to the motor and installing AC input power wiring Refer to figure 6 5 for a description of the power terminal block 6 1 Removing and Replacing the Cover ATTENTION DC bus capacitors retain hazardous voltages after input power has been removed After disconnecting input power wait five minutes for the DC bus capacitors to discharge and then check the voltage with a voltmeter to ensure the DC bus capacitors are discharged before touching any internal components Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life 6 1 1 Removing and
250. s PI loop will be held at the current value that is it will not increase or decrease If this input function is open the integrator for the Process PI loop will be allowed to increase or decrease Parameter Descriptions 12 93 28 PI Reset If this input function is closed the integrator for the Process PI loop will be reset to 0 If this input function is open the integrator for the Process PI loop will integrate normally 29 38 Reserved 39 UserSetBitO 40 UserSetBit1 If either UserSetBit0 or UserSetBit1 is not defined a zero value is used in place of the input to determine which User Set is loaded while Dynamic Mode is enabled These bits only affect the drive when Dynamic Mode 204 is active See table 12 9 Table 12 9 Dynamic User Mode Dynamic User Set Mode UserBit1 UserBitO User Set Loaded In Memory 0 0 User Set 1 0 1 User Set 2 1 0 User Set 3 1 1 User Set 3 Type 2 Alarms Some digital input programming may cause conflicts that result in a Type 2 alarm For example Digital In1 Sel set to 5 Start in 3 wire control and Digital In2 Sel set to 7 Run in 2 wire control These alarms prevent the drive from starting Refer to chapter 13 for more information about these alarms Dig In Status 116 indicates the current state of the digital inputs 12 94 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 380 Digital Out1 Sel Any relay programmed as fault or alarm will energize pick up
251. s one of these enclosure ratings S NEMA 1 Vented Intended for general purpose indoor applications e Flange NEMA 1 Intended for through the panel mounting IP20 NEMA 1 front side NEMA 4X heatsink backside IP20 Open Debris label removed from the top of the drive S NEMA 4X IP66 Intended for use in indoor environments that require a dust tight and drip tight corrosion resistant enclosure Protects against heavy jet spray S NEMA 12 Dust tight and drip tight Tables 2 3 2 4 and 2 5 list the drives and their power ratings About the Drive 2 3 Table 2 3 208 240 VAC Power Ratings IMS Buyunow jo sseipsebei youlqed ey 04u peyedissip 8q IW PUB SAUP OU JO 1NJONS 01 UO9 ey Aq peyedissip SHEM yuls yeay y ynos P payedissip SHEM LS Jojowresed Z Jaydeyo 0 19431 salouanbeyy Jaleo y iy 104 z SL UUM X 976106 S P ZL WWAN 104 XY UUM Z gogide SOAUP Xp YWEN 104 LO UUM Jequunu japow y u Z 9Led 1 aap YWEN 104 ec0Z 91S 9099 801 18 OZ rel Lp z 84 z v9 z4 292 6 Sz SI Oe S 84 Se xxxx0Z0 zAZdS9 S6ES RE LRE v8 9 va 9 96 p l 129 8 6r S ZS 8 EL ULL LE Gt SL 102 xxxxpG0 zAZdS9 6Ser FOV gsge 69 129p zv v4 GSS ev Sge g6e 94 OF Sz OF LE SL xxxxep0 zAZdS9 Gsle Lg vole Orr ose 0 82 19091 62e z ze 8 Sz 8 67 H ZL ZOL G S SZ 9 2 OL XxxxBz0 zATASO 66Ee CVE 902 O E Z ozz 6 2e 942 esz 7 Oz
252. s used to avoid mechanical resonance operating setpoints 2 16 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 2 4 23 Flying Start The flying start feature enabled in parameter 169 is used to start into a rotating motor as rapidly as possible and resume normal operation with a minimal impact on load or speed This action will prevent an overcurrent trip and significantly reduce the time for the motor to reach its desired frequency Since the motor is picked up smoothly at its rotating speed and ramped to the proper speed little or no mechanical stress is present 2 4 24 Voltage Class The voltage class see parameter 202 in chapter 12 identifies the general input voltage to the drive This general voltage includes a range of actual operating voltages A 400 volt class drive will have an acceptable input voltage range of 380 to 480 VAC There are also the 200 volt class drives with a range of 200 to 240 volts operation While the hardware remains the same for each class other variables such as factory defaults and power unit ratings will change In most cases all drives within a voltage class can be reprogrammed to accommodate a motor within its voltage class This can be done by resetting the Voltage Class parameter 202 to a different setup within the voltage class As an example consider a 480 volt drive This drive comes with factory default values for 480 V 60 Hz with motor data defaulted for U S motors HP rated 1750 RPM etc By
253. se conditions are determined to be undesirable or unsafe an auxiliary contact on the output contactor should be wired to a drive digital input that is programmed as Enable This will cause the drive to execute a coast to stop cease output whenever an output contactor is opened helping to prevent the drive from operating without the contactors prior closure 4 4 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 4 2 Control and Signal Wire The terminal block on the Main Control board provides terminals for 24VDC power for the eight remote control inputs as well as the terminals for the analog input output signals Refer to tables 4 3 and 4 4 for signal and control wiring specifications Signal Type Table 4 3 Recommended Signal and Control Wire Wire Type s Belden 8760 9460 or equiv Description 0 750 mm 18 AWG twisted pair 100 shield with drain Belden 8770 or equiv 0 750 mm 18 AWG 3 conductor shielded for remote pot only Minimum Insulation Rating 300V 75 90 C 167 194 F Unshielded Control Per US NEC or applicable national or local code Shielded Control Multi conductor shielded cable such 0 750 mm 18 AWG 3 conductor shielded 300V 60 C 140 F as Belden 8770 or equiv 1 If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits the use of shielded wire may not be necessary but is always recommended
254. sed operation must not exceed one cycle per minute or drive damage will occur ATTENTION The drive start stop enable control circuitry includes solid state components If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exist an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive An auxiliary braking method may be required Output Contactor Precaution ATTENTION To guard against drive damage when using output contactors the following information must be read and understood One or more output contactors may be installed between the drive and motor s for the purpose of disconnecting or isolating certain motors loads If a contactor is opened while the drive is operating power will be removed from the respective motor but the drive will continue to produce voltage at the output terminals Disconnecting a motor under load can cause damage to the contactor as well as the drive because the DV DT change in voltage Change in time is severe causing a rapid increase in current at the contacts and the resultant current draw from the drive If at all possible a control scheme should attempt to send a stop to the drive to minimize any energy being sent to the motor before opening the contactors In addition reconnecting a motor to an active drive by closing the contactor could produce excessive current that may cause the drive to fault If any of the
255. sent at terminals T1 T2 and T3 U V and W 7 Output Power Range 0 0 to Drive Rated kW x2 0 1 kW Default Read Only Access 0 Path Monitor gt Metering See also Displays the output power present at T1 T2 and T3 U V and W 8 Output Powr Fcir Range 0 00 to 1 00 0 01 Default Read Only Access 2 Path Monitor gt Metering See also Displays the output power factor 9 Elapsed MWh Range 0 0 to 429 496 729 5 MWh 0 1 MWh Default Read Only Access 2 Path Monitor gt Metering See also Displays the accumulated output energy of the drive Elapsed Run Time Range 0 0 to 429 496 729 5 Hr 0 1 Hr Default Read Only Access 1 Path Monitor gt Metering See also Displays the accumulated time the drive has been outputting power 12 6 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 11 MOP Frequency Range 400 0 0 1 Hz Default Read Only Access 1 Path Monitor gt Metering Seealso 194 195 Displays the setpoint value of the signal at the MOP Motor Operated Potentiometer function The setpoint can be retained after power down or stop by setting parameter 194 12 DC Bus Voltage Range Voltage rating dependent 0 1 VDC Default Read Only Access 1 Path Monitor gt Metering See also Displays the present DC bus voltage level 13 DC Bus Memory Range Voltage rating dependent 0 1 VDC Default Read Only Access 2 Path Monitor gt Metering See also Displays a six minute average of the DC bus voltage
256. ser Set 1 N States Text For N Lus Load User Set 2 L Load User Set 1 j BIS8CDEFGHIJKLM Yes No v Next A gt a Save EK 7 4 K Move through label text G Move through letters and Function List a LY symbols E F1 Load User Set 1 F2 Undefined Toggle between upper F3 Undefined C and lower case ee F4 Esc or timeout to MZ Process Display Function List screen V F1 Load User Set 1 F2 Undefined gt gt Stopped tut F3 Undefined 0 00 Volts a 0 00 Amps Esc or ER 0 00 Hz rocess Roar 7 screen Luset Fitq gt gt stopped Autol OIM will use defaul PO SP600 F Key label Luse1 0 00 Vo ts 0 00 Amps 0 00 Luseal Fitq OIM will use custom F Key label LuseA Figure 9 13 Customizing the Function Key Label Text 9 8 4 Setting the Display Timeout Period When the OIM is inactive that is no keys have been pressed for a user specified period of time the process display screen becomes active To return to the previously active screen press any key To return to the Main Menu press fic To set the display timeout period select Display Timeout from the Display menu The timeout period can range from 10 to 1200 seconds 20 minutes This feature can also be disabled by pressing the F1 key while in the display time screen Note that each OIM conn
257. ser Set 2 User Set 3 Restore via defined Digital Input s or P 205 DynUsrSetSel Figure 2 3 Dynamic Mode Operation 2 4 20 Process PI Loop The internal process PI function provides closed loop process control with proportional and integral control action The PI function reads a process variable input to the drive and compares it to a desired setpoint stored in the drive The algorithm will then adjust the output of the process PI regulator thereby changing drive output frequency to try to make the process variable equal the setpoint Refer to the descriptions of parameters 124 to 138 in chapter 12 for more information 2 4 21 S Curve The S Curve function of SP600 drives allows control of the jerk component of acceleration and deceleration through adjustment of the S Curve parameter 146 Jerk is defined as the rate of change of acceleration and or deceleration By adjusting the percentage of the S Curve applied to the normal accel decel ramps the ramp takes the shape of an S allowing a smoother transition that produces less mechanical stress and smoother control for light loads 2 4 22 Three Skip Bands Avoidance Frequencies The skip band function see parameters 84 to 87 in chapter 12 provides three skip bands also called avoidance frequencies that the drive will ramp through but will not continuously run within You can set the skip frequency center frequency and bandwidth of each band This function i
258. setting of IR Voltage Drop A start command is required following the initiation of this setting The parameter returns to 0 Ready following the test at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode Used when the motor cannot be uncoupled from the load 2 Rotate Tune A temporary command that initiates a Static Tune followed by a rotational test for the best possible automatic setting of Flux Current Ref A start command is required following initiation of this setting The parameter returns to 0 Ready following the test at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode ATTENTION Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this procedure Autotune 61 Rotate Tune To guard against possible injury and or equipment damage it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding Parameter Descriptions 12 15 Important Rotate Tune is used when motor is uncoupled from the load Results may not be valid if a load is coupled to the motor during this procedure If the drive fails to Autotune and generates a drive fault Step 1 Press any function F key to acknowledge the fault Step 2 Press the ESC key to return to the Main Menu Step 3 Select the Diagnostics Menu Step 4 Select View Fault Queue Step 5 Clear the fault using EJ Step 6 Return to parameter 61 to re start t
259. setting the Voltage Class parameter to low voltage this represents 400 V in this case the defaults are changed to 400 V 50 Hz settings with motor data for European motors kW rated 1500 RPM etc 2 4 25 Motor Cable Lengths The length of cable between the drive and motor may be limited for various application reasons The primary areas of concern are S Reflected wave e Cable charging The reflected wave phenomenon also known as transmission line effect produces very high peak voltages on the motor due to voltage reflection While Reliance Electric drives have patented software that limits the voltage peak to 2 times the DC bus voltage and reduce the number of occurrences many motors have inadequate insulation systems to tolerate these peaks About the Drive 2 17 Caution should be taken to understand the effects and restrictions when applying the drive to extended motor lead length applications Proper cable type motor and drive selection is required to minimize the potential risks 2 4 26 Economizer Mode Economizer mode consists of operating the drive in sensorless vector control mode with an energy saving function E SVC When the drive is in this mode and operating at steady state output frequency the output voltage is automatically adjusted as the load is increased or decreased This is done so that minimum current is supplied to the motor thereby optimizing its efficiency By adjusting the output voltage the flux
260. st Range 0 0 to Motor NP Volts x 0 25 0 1 VAC Default Motor NP Volts x 0 25 Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Volts per Hertz See also 53 70 83 Sets the voltage boost level for starting and acceleration when Custom V Hz mode is selected in Torque Perf Mode 53 After acceleration has stopped the output volts hertz is set by the steady state operating curve See figure 12 7 70 Run Boost Range 0 0 to Motor NP Volts x 0 25 0 1 VAC Default Motor HP Volts x 0 25 Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Volts per Hertz See also 53 69 83 Sets the boost level for steady state or deceleration when Fan Pmp V Hz or Custom V Hz modes are selected in Torque Perf Mode 53 This boost level applies in the range from zero to Break Frequency 72 See figure 12 7 71 Break Voltage Range 0 0 to Motor NP Volts 0 1 VAC Default Motor NP Volts x 0 25 Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Volts per Hertz See also 53 72 83 Sets the voltage the drive outputs at Break Frequency 72 and defines the volts per hertz ratio at the break frequency Applies only if Fan Pump or Custom V Hz is selected in parameter 53 Torque Perf Mode See figure 12 7 72 Break Frequency Range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Default Motor NP Freq Access 2 Path Motor Control gt Volts per Hertz See also 53 71 83 Sets the frequency the drive will output at Break Voltage 71 Applies only if Fan Pump or Custom V Hz is selected in parameter 53 Torque Perf Mode See figure 12
261. st be satisfied for SP600 drives to meet the requirements of EN61800 3 for the Second Environment Industrial Standard SP600 CE compatible drive e Grounding as described in section 5 2 of this manual Output power control I O and signal wiring must be braided shielded cable with a coverage of 75 or better metal conduit or equivalent attenuation All shielded cables should terminate with the proper shielded connector e Conditions in table 2 6 About the Drive 2 19 Table 2 6 SP600 Drives EN1800 3 Second Environment Compatibility Restrict Motor Internal Cable to Filter External Input Drive Description 40 m 131 ft Option Filter Ferrite Drive Only V ith any Comm Opti ith ControlNe ive Only ith any Comm Opti ith ControlNe ive Only ith ControlNe ive Only ith any Comm Opti ith ControlNe ive Only W W D W W D with any Comm Opti W D W W D W ith any Comm Opti With ControlNet QISISISTSISISISISISISYTSISYS 1 See table 2 2 for frame size definitions 2 Input cables through a Ferrite Core Frames A B and C Fair Rite 2643102002 or equivalent Frame D Fair Rite 2643251002 or equivalent 2 20 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 2 6 Drive Connections Figure 2 4 shows the locations of the drive terminal blocks and connectors used to set up and operate the drive on NEMA 1 drives
262. t Stop Brake Modes Record of User Settings E 3 Parameter Name Path File gt Group Setting DB Resistor Type Dynamic Control gt Stop Brake Modes LevelSense Start Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes Flying Start En Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes Flying StartGain Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes Auto Rstrt Tries Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes Auto Rstrt Delay Dynamic Control gt Stop Restart Modes Power Loss Mode Dynamic Control gt Stop Power Loss Power Loss Time Dynamic Control gt Stop Power Loss Direction Mode Utility gt Direction Config Save OIM Ref Utility gt OIM Ref Config Man Ref Preload Utility gt OIM Ref Config Save MOP Ref Utility gt MOP Config MOP Rate Utility gt MOP Config Param Access Lvl Utility gt Drive Memory Reset To Defalts Utility gt Drive Memory Load Frm Usr Set Utility gt Drive Memory Save To User Set Utility gt Drive Memory Reset Meters Utility gt Drive Memory Language Utility gt Drive Memory Voltage Class Utility gt Drive Memory Dyn UserSet Cnfg Utility gt Drive Memory DynUsrSetSel Utility gt Drive Memory Dyn UserSet Actv Utility gt Drive Memory Testpoint 1 Sel Utility gt Diagnostics Testpoint 1 Data Utility gt Diagnostics Testpoint 2 Sel Utility gt Diagnostics Testpoint 2 Data Utility gt Diagnostics Fault Config 1 Utility gt Faults Fault Clear Util
263. t be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE Input provides high common mode immunity 7 4 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 7 3 I O Wiring Examples ATTENTION Configuring an analog input for 0 20 mA operation and driving it from a voltage source could cause component damage Verify proper configuration prior to applying input signals ATTENTION Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage exists when using bipolar input sources Noise and drift in sensitive input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motor speed and direction Use speed command parameters to help reduce input source sensitivity Input Output Potentiometer Unipolar Speed Reference 10k Ohm Pot Recommended 2k Ohm minimum Table 7 2 I O Wiring Examples Connection Example Required Parameter Settings Select Speed Reference source Param 090 1 Analog In 1 Adjust Scaling Param 091 092 322 323 Check Results Param 016 Joystick Bipolar Speed Reference 10V Input lO O Q 10V Com 10V Power Source Set Direction Mode Param 190 1 Bipolar Adjust Scaling Param 091 092 325 326 Check Results Param 017 Analog Input Bipolar Speed Reference 10V Input Adjust Scaling Param 091 092 325 326 Check Results Param 017 Analog Input Unipolar Speed Reference 0 to 10V Input Adjust Scaling Param 091 092 325 326 Check Results Param 017 An
264. tch the selection in parameter 384 i e At Freq Hz At Torque Amps 386 Dig Out2 OnTime Range 0 00 to 600 00 Sec 0 01 Sec Default 0 00 Sec Access 2 Path Inputs amp Output gt Digital Outputs See also 384 Sets the on delay time for the digital outputs This is the time between the occurrence of a condition and activation of the relay 12 100 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 387 Dig Out2 OffTime Range 0 00 to 600 00 Sec 0 01 Sec Default 0 00 Sec Access 2 Path Inputs amp Output gt Digital Outputs See also 384 Sets the off delay time for the digital outputs This is the time between the disappearance of a condition and de activation of the relay Dig Out2 OnTime 386 Output prane Relay Out2 384 Comparator Delay Term 24 25 26 Dig Out2 Timer Level 385 Dig Out2 OffTime 387 Figure 12 54 Dig Out2 OffTime 387 Parameter Descriptions 12 101 Parameter Descriptions 12 102 Troubleshooting the Drive ATTENTION Only qualified electrical personnel familiar with the construction and operation of this equipment and the hazards involved should install adjust operate or service this equipment Read and understand this manual and other applicable manuals in their entirety before proceeding Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life The SP600 drive provides the following ways to determine the status of the
265. te that the drive is operating or may operate at or near zero speed Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life 12 18 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 82 Maximum Speed Range 5 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 0 Hz Default 50 0 or 60 0 Hz dependent on voltage class Access 0 Path Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits See also 55 83 91 202 Sets the high limit for the speed reference after scaling is applied See figure 12 7 ATTENTION The user is responsible for ensuring that driven machinery all drive train mechanisms and application material are capable of safe operation at the maximum operating speed of the drive Overspeed detection in the drive determines when the drive shuts down See figure 12 7 Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury 83 Overspeed Limit Range 0 0 to 20 0 Hz 0 1 Hz Default 10 0 Hz Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Spd Mode amp Limits See also 55 82 Sets the incremental amount of the output frequency above Maximum Speed allowable for functions such as slip compensation See figure 12 7 Maximum Speed 82 Overspeed Limit 83 must be lt to Maximum Frequency 55 T Allowable Output Frequency Range gt Bus Regulation or Current Limit La Allowable Output Frequency Range b Normal Operation 1 lt Allowable Reference Frequency Range gt Max Volts Motor Volts l Le Frequ
266. ter Descriptions 12 55 196 197 CO Param Access Lvl Range 0 Basic 1 Standard 2 Advanced Default Read Only Access 0 Path Utility gt Drive Memory See also Displays the present parameter access level Refer to chapter 11 for more information about parameter access levels Reset To Defalts Range 0 Ready 1 Factory 2 Low Voltage 3 High Voltage Default 0 Ready Access 0 Path Utility gt Drive Memory See also Resets all parameter values to defaults except parameters 196 201 and 202 Option 1 resets the drive to factory settings Options 2 and 3 reset the drive to alternate voltage and current ratings as shown Drive Voltage class 20 o eo 400 600 Low Voltage 200 High Voltage 230 460 600 Low voltage class is typical European voltage ratings volts frequency power units High voltage class is typical U S A voltage ratings volts frequency power units 12 56 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 198 199 Lo Load Frm Usr Set Range 0 Ready 1 User Set 1 2 User Set 2 3 User Set 3 Default 0 Ready Access 1 Path Utility gt Drive Memory Seealso 199 Loads a previously saved set of parameter values from a selected user set location in the drive s non volatile memory to active drive memory After data is successfully transferred the value returns to 0 The drive has the capability of saving up to three complete sets of drive parameters config
267. tion of the equipment Wire size should be determined based on the size of conduit openings and applicable local national and international codes such as NEC CEC Evaluate wire sizes branch circuit protection and E stop wiring see section 7 1 before continuing with the drive installation Power Wiring ATTENTION National Codes and standards NEC VDE BSI etc and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types conductor sizes branch circuit protection and disconnect devices Failure to do so may result in personal injury and or equipment damage Cable Types Acceptable for 200 600 Volt Installations A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations For many installations unshielded cable is adequate provided it can be separated from sensitive circuits As an approximate guide allow a spacing of 0 3 meters 1 foot for every 10 meters 32 8 feet of length In all cases long parallel runs must be avoided Do not use cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 15 mils 0 4 mm 0 015 in See table 4 1 Wiring Requirements for the Drive 4 1 Unshielded THHN THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry environments provided adequate free air space and or conduit fill rates limits are provided Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas Any wire chosen must hav
268. tively one of the internal preset speed setpoint values can be selected via logic control if any of the Digital Inx Sel 361 366 are configured to be Speed Sel 1 2 or 3 Table 12 2 Default Values for Preset Speeds 1 7 Parameter No Parameter Name Default Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 6 Preset Speed 7 12 26 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 117 Trim ln Select LOG Specifies which analog input signal is being used as a trim input See figure 12 11 117 Select O Reference A P Trimmed Reference A Figure 12 11 Trim Input Select Parameter Descriptions 12 27 118 Trim Out Select Range See figure 12 12 Default See figure 12 12 Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Speed Trim See also 117 119 120 Specifies if Ref A speed reference is to be trimmed N amp AS x x x x x x x x X 0 1 Trimmed bs 14 13 12 1110 9 8 2 1 0 O Not Trimmed B Nibble 4 Nibble 3 i Nibble 1 X Reserved it Factory Default Bit Values Figure 12 12 Trim Out Select 118 119 Trim Hi Range Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz Default 60 0 Hz Access 2 Path Speed Command gt Speed Trim See also 82 117 Analog reference scaling Scales the upper value of the Trim In Select 117 selection when the source is an analog input This value should be set in conjunction with Analo
269. top CF 4 362 Digital In2 Sel Start 5 363 Digital In3 Sel Function Loss 3 364 Digtal In4 Sel Jog 10 365 Digital In5 Sel Auto Manual 18 366 Digital In6 Sel Speed Sel 1 15 Parameter Descriptions 12 87 When Digital In x Sel is set to option 2 Clear Faults the Stop key cannot be used to clear a fault condition Typical 3 wire inputs These require that only 3 wire functions are chosen Including 2 wire selections will cause a type 2 alarm Typical 2 wire inputs These require that only 2 wire functions are chosen Including 3 wire selections will cause a type 2 alarm 4To access Preset Speed 1 set Speed Ref A Sel to Preset Speed 1 See table 12 5 Table 12 5 Speed Select Inputs Speed Select Inputs 2 Reference Source Speed Ref A Sel 90 Preset Speed 1 101 Preset Speed 2 102 Preset Speed 3 103 Preset Speed 4 104 Preset Speed 5 105 Preset Speed 6 106 Preset Speed 7 107 a A2 A O O O O e hll kll lol lal P l 9 E I H G Assigns an input function to the drive s digital inputs Note that digital inputs Run Jog Stop Clear Faults and Direction control functions are operational only when the terminal block is selected as the control source Logic Source Sel Terminal Blk Table 12 6 Default Values for Parameters 361 366 Parameter No Default Value 4 Stop CF 5 Start 3 Function Loss 1
270. top condition Ifa Dynamic Mode command from digital inputs occurs while the drive 2 14 SP600 AC Drive User Manual is running the transfer of the selected User Set data will not occur until the drive is stopped assuming that the Dynamic Mode and the transfer command are both still active when the drive stops A Dynamic Mode command from the user set select parameter 205 while the drive is running will be immediately rejected Typical Setup Operation Step 1 While in normal mode Dyn UserSet Cnfg 204 x0 enter data into drive and save to User Set using Save to User Set 199 Repeat for each needed User Set Check that Dynamic User Set related Digital Inputs parameters 361 366 and Datalink Inputs parameters 300 307 are programmed the same in each Step 2 Enable Dynamic User Set Mode Dyn UserSet Cnfg 204 x1 Step 3 Test restoring each programmed user Set via digital Inputs or DynUsrSetSel 205 If a Fault or Type 2 Alarm occurs Drive Alarm 2 212 is non zero the User Set causing the error is loaded see Dyn UserSet Actv 206 for indication Return to Normal Mode Dyn UserSet Cnfg 204 x0 correct the Digital Input or Datalink definition s and save to the User Set that was loaded Repeat step 2 Step 4 Begin normal drive operation Remember that User Sets can only be loaded while the drive is stopped At power up the drive will load operating memory with the values contained in the active no
271. trical energy and returning it to the drive the bus voltage is maintained As long as there is mechanical energy the ride through time is extended and the motor remains fully fluxed up If AC input power is restored the drive can ramp the motor to the correct speed without the need for reconnecting 185 Power Loss Time Range 0 0 to 60 0 Sec 0 1 Sec Default 0 5 Sec Access 1 Path Dynamic Control gt Stop Power Loss See also 184 Sets the time that the drive will remain in power loss mode before a fault is issued 12 52 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 190 Direction Mode Range 0 Unipolar Co 1 Bipolar 2 Reverse Dis Default 0 Unipolar Access 0 Path Utility gt Direction Config See also 91 92 320 327 361 366 Selects the method for control of drive direction ATTENTION Setting parameter 190 to 0 or 1 may cause unwanted motor direction Verify driven machinery cannot be damaged by reverse rotation before changing the setting of this parameter to 0 or 1 Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of equipment 0 Unipolar The drive receives an unsigned reference signal and a separate direction command from a logic source such as a digital input or DPI port device Example Analog speed reference 0 to 100 Direction control e OIM Forward Reverse key e Terminal block 1 Bipolar The drive receives a signed reference 100 to 100 In this case
272. uate 11 7 Parameter Descriptions Troubleshooting the Drive 13 1 Verifying that DC Bus Capacitors are Discharged Before Servicing the Dve sese ee eee eee 13 1 13 2 Determining Drive Status Using the Ready LED 13 3 13 S About Alarm TTT 13 3 1 Alarm Descriptions sese 13 4 About T TTT 13 4 1 About the Fault Queue 13 4 2 Clearing Faute eee eee 13 4 3 Fault Descriptions and Corrective Actions 13 11 13 5 Test Point Codes and Functions sss eee eee 13 17 13 6 Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions 13 18 13 7 Replacement Parts sese eee ee eee eee eee 13 23 13 8 Troubleshooting the Drive Using the LCD OIM 13 23 13 8 1 Accessing the Fault Queue eee eee e 13 24 13 8 2 Accessing the Fault Parameters 000 13 24 13 8 3 Accessing the Drive Status Parameters 13 25 13 8 4 Accessing the List of Changed Parameters 13 25 13 8 5 Determining the Product Version sese see 13 26 13 8 6 Contacting Tech Support for Assistance 13 28 SP600 AC Drive User Manual Figure 2 1 Identifying the Drive by Model Number sss sese sese eee 2 2 Figure 2 2 Normal Mode Operation sees ee eee ee eee 2 14 Figure 2 3 Dynamic Mode Operation sss sees sees eee eee 2 16 Figure 2 4 Drive Connections NEMA 1 Drives sss sees eee ee eee eee 2 21 Figure 2 5 Drive Connections NEMA 4 Drives sss see esse eee eee 2 22 Figure 2 6 DPI Port 2 on NEMA 4 Des sss sees
273. ue current component exceeds the programmed limit 13 At Temp The drive operating temperature exceeds the programmed limit 14 At Bus Volts The drive bus voltage exceeds the programmed limit 15 At PI Error The drive Process PI Loop error exceeds the programmed limit 16 DC Braking The drive is currently executing either a DC Brake or a Ramp to Hold stop command and the DC braking voltage is still being applied to the motor 17 Curr Limit The drive is currently limiting output current 18 Economize The drive is currently reducing the output voltage to the motor to attempt to reduce energy costs during a lightly loaded situation 19 Motor Overld The drive has detected a motor overload 20 Power Loss The drive has monitored DC bus voltage and sensed a loss of input AC power that caused the DC bus voltage to fall below the fixed monitoring value 73 of DC Bus Memory when power loss mode is set to coast and 82 of DC Bus Memory when power loss mode is set to decel See parameters 13 and 184 21 Input 1 Link Outputs the state of digital input 1 22 Input 2 Link Outputs the state of digital input 2 12 96 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 23 Input 3 Link Outputs the state of digital input 3 24 Input 4 Link Outputs the state of digital input 4 25 Input 5 Link Outputs the state of digital input 5 26 Input 6 Link Outputs the state of digital input 6 27 TB in Manual Terminal
274. upt speed change may occur depending upon the new reference level and the rate specified in these parameters Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury If the local LCD OIM is not the selected control source or reference source removing the OIM while the drive is powered will have no effect on drive operation SP600 AC Drive User Manual 9 3 Display Description Operational Status Line lt Device Selected Error Text Menu Programming Screen or Process User Display lt Function Key Line Function Key F1 F2 F3 F4 definitions Port peripheral identification Identifies port or peripheral on DPI about which the OIM is displaying information See section 9 6 Direction indicator Indicates actual motor direction Command Actual Direction Direction Indicator gt gt gt gt flashing lt lt flashing lt lt Operating status for example Running Stopped etc Alarm annunciation Alarm has occurred Auto Manual mode status Write protect password status a unlocked password disabled locked password enabled See section 11 4 Figure 9 3 The Display Main Menu Shown Using the LCD OIM 9 3 9 3 1 Key Descriptions Table 9 1 Key Functions Key Function Scroll through options or user function keys move cursor to the left Scroll through options o
275. urations These sets can be restored to drive memory for runtime operation An F Key on the LCD OIM can be configured for this function Refer to chapter 9 Save To User Set Range 0 Ready 1 User Set 1 2 User Set 2 3 User Set 3 Default 0 Ready Access 1 Path Utility gt Drive Memory Seealso 198 Saves the parameter values in active drive memory to a user set in drive non volatile memory After the data if successfully transferred the value returns to 0 An F Key on the LCD OIM can be configured for this function Refer to chapter 9 200 Reset Meters Range 0 Ready 1 MWh 2 Elapsed Time Default 0 Ready Access 1 Path Utility gt Drive Memory See also Resets the selected meter to zero 1 MWh Resets Elapsed MWh 9 to zero 2 Elapsed Time Resets Elapsed Run Time 10 to zero Parameter Descriptions 12 57 201 Language Range 0 Not Selected 1 English 2 Francais 3 Espanol 4 Italiano 5 Deutsch 6 Reserved 7 Portugues Default 0 Not Selected Access 2 Path Utility gt Drive Memory See also Selects the display language when using an LCD OIM 202 Voltage Class Range 2 Low Voltage Co 3 High Voltage Default Based on Drive Type Access 2 Path Utility gt Drive Memory See also 55 Automatically resets the parameters that change the drive voltage rating current rating scaling and motor data to the appropriate defaults based on v
276. uts gt Analog Inputs Analog In 1 Loss Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Analog In 2 Hi Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Analog In 2 Lo Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Analog In 2 Loss Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Inputs Anlg Out Absolut Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Outputs Analog Ou Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Outputs Analog Out Hi Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Outputs Analog Dun Lo Inputs amp Outputs gt Analog Outputs gital In1 Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs ital In2 Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs ital In3 Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs ital In4 Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs ital In6 Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Inputs ig ig ig igital In5 Sel ig ig ital Out1 Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs D D D D D D D D ig Out1 Level Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs Record of User Settings Parameter Name Path File gt Group Setting 382 Dig Outi OnTime Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs 383 Dig Out OffTime Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs 384 Digital Out2 Sel Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs 385 Dig Out2 Level Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs 386 Dig Out2 OnTime Inputs amp Outputs gt Digital Outputs
277. w value of the band See B in figure 12 8 Frequency Command Frequency gt Drive Output aF requency i Skip 1 2 Band gt L LK L h 35 Hz Skip Frequency gt Skip 1 2 Band gt P E Time Figure 12 8 Skip Freq Band 87 12 20 SP600 AC Drive User Manual 89 Logic Source Sel Range Default Access See also 0 Terminal BIk 1 Local OIM 2 DPI Port 2 3 DPI Port 3 4 Reserved 5 Network 6 Reserved 7 All Ports 1 Local OIM 0 Path Speed Command gt Control Src Select 90 ATTENTION Changing parameter 89 to Terminal Blk or Network while LevelSense Start is enabled may start the drive if a start command is on from the newly selected logic source When LevelSense Start is enabled the user must ensure that automatic start up of the driven equipment will not cause injury to operating personnel or damage to the driven equipment In addition the user is responsible for providing suitable audible or visual alarms or other devices to indicate that this function is enabled and the drive may start at any moment Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life ATTENTION Removing and replacing the LCD OIM while the drive is running may cause an abrupt speed change if the LCD OIM is the selected reference source but is not the selected control source The drive will ramp to the reference level provided by the OIM atth
278. y to building steel should be used All circuits including the AC input ground conductor should be grounded independently and directly to this point bar vaa wea xs O Figure 5 3 Single Point Grounding Panel Layout Finding Wire Routing Locations and Grounding the Drive 5 3 Safety Ground PE This is the safety ground for the drive that is required by code This point must be connected to adjacent building steel girder joist a floor ground rod or bus bar see figures 5 2 and 5 3 Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes Shield Termination SHLD The SHLD terminal located on the cable entry plate provides a grounding point for the motor cable shield Refer to figure 5 1 for location The motor cable shield should be connected to this terminal drive end and the motor frame motor end A shield terminating cable gland may so be used When shielded cable is used for control and signal wiring the shield should be grounded at the source end only not at the drive end RFI Filter Grounding Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage current

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

安全データシート(SDS)のダウンロードはこちら  Digital Board Voltage Display Operating Instructions  5．障害者・高齢者のヒュー マンインターフェイス  l`étape 2  ACTIVE FOAM  Instalación del controlador táctil serial    TP-Link TL-POE200 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file